Rohde & Schwarz R&S FSL3 Operating Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Rohde & Schwarz Manuals
  4. Measuring Instruments
  5. R&S FSL3
  6. Operating manual

Rohde & Schwarz R&S FSL3 Operating Manual

Spectrum analyzer
Hide thumbs Also See for R&S FSL3:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Operating Manual
Spectrum Analyzer
R&S FSL3
1300.2502K03
1300.2502K13
1300.2519.12-11
R&S FSL6
1300.2502K06
1300.2502K16
Test and Measurement
R&S FSL18
1300.2502K18
1300.2502K28

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the R&S FSL3 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Rohde & Schwarz R&S FSL3

Summary of Contents for Rohde & Schwarz R&S FSL3

  • Page 1 Operating Manual Spectrum Analyzer R&S FSL3 R&S FSL6 R&S FSL18 1300.2502K03 1300.2502K06 1300.2502K18 1300.2502K13 1300.2502K16 1300.2502K28 Test and Measurement 1300.2519.12-11...
  • Page 2 Throughout this manual, the Spectrum Analyzer R&S FSL is abbreviated as R&S FSL. ® ® R&S is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners...
  • Page 3 Grouped Safety Messages Make sure to read through and observe the following safety instructions! All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety standard of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our products and the auxiliary equipment required for them are designed and tested in accordance with the relevant safety standards.

  • Page 4: Basic Safety Instructions

    Grouped Safety Messages Tags and their meaning DANGER DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. WARNING WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
  • Page 5 Grouped Safety Messages 5. If handling the product yields hazardous of the connecting cable is regarded as the substances or fuels that must be disposed of disconnecting device. In such cases, it must in a special way, e.g. coolants or engine oils be ensured that the power plug is easily that must be replenished regularly, the safety reachable and accessible at all times...
  • Page 6 Grouped Safety Messages 20. For permanently installed equipment without national regulations regarding waste built-in fuses, circuit breakers or similar disposal and recycling. protective devices, the supply circuit must be 28. Please be aware that in the event of a fire, fused in such a way that suitable protection toxic substances (gases, liquids etc.) that is provided for users and products.
  • Page 7 Informaciones elementales de seguridad ¡Es imprescindible leer y observar las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad! El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al día con los estándares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de seguridad vigentes.
  • Page 8 Informaciones elementales de seguridad Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para tratar de evitar daños y peligros de toda clase. Es necesario de que se lean las siguientes informaciones de seguridad concienzudamente y se tengan en cuenta debidamente antes de la puesta en funcionamiento del producto. También deberán ser tenidas en cuenta las informaciones para la protección de personas que encontrarán en el capítulo correspondiente de la documentación de producto y que también son obligatorias de seguir.
  • Page 9 Informaciones elementales de seguridad 3. Como en todo producto de fabricación El empresario/usuario está comprometido a industrial no puede ser excluido en general de valorar y señalar áreas de trabajo en las que que se produzcan al usarlo elementos que se corra un riesgo aumentado de exposición a puedan generar alergias, los llamados radiaciones para evitar riesgos.
  • Page 10 Informaciones elementales de seguridad 12. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el 20. En caso de que los productos que son cable eléctrico. Compruebe regularmente el instalados fijamente en un lugar sean sin correcto estado de los cables de conexión a protector implementado, autointerruptor o red.
  • Page 11 Informaciones elementales de seguridad 27. Baterías y acumuladores no deben de ser de horquilla, carros etc. El usuario es expuestos a temperaturas altas o al fuego. responsable de que los productos sean Guardar baterías y acumuladores fuera del sujetados de forma segura a los medios de alcance de los niños.
  • Page 12 Kundeninformation zur Batterieverordnung (BattV) Dieses Gerät enthält eine schadstoffhaltige Batterie. Diese darf nicht mit dem Hausmüll entsorgt werden. Nach Ende der Lebensdauer darf die Entsorgung nur über eine Rohde&Schwarz-Kundendienststelle oder eine geeignete Sammelstelle erfolgen. Safety Regulations for Batteries (according to BattV) This equipment houses a battery containing harmful substances that must not be disposed of as normal household waste.
  • Page 13 Customer Information Regarding Product Disposal The German Electrical and Electronic Equipment (ElektroG) Act is an implementation of the following EC directives: • 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) and • 2002/95/EC on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in e lectrical and electronic equipment (RoHS).
  • Page 14 QUALITÄTSZERTIFIKAT CERTIFICATE OF QUALITY CERTIFICAT DE QUALITÉ Sehr geehrter Kunde, Dear Customer, Cher Client, Sie haben sich für den Kauf eines you have decided to buy a Rohde & vous avez choisi d‘acheter un produit Rohde & Schwarz-Produktes ent- Schwarz product. You are thus as- Rohde &...
  • Page 15 Customer Support Technical support – where and when you need it For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde &...
  • Page 16 Address List Headquarters, Plants and Subsidiaries Locations Worldwide Headquarters Please refer to our homepage: www.rohde-schwarz.com ◆ Sales Locations ROHDE&SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG Phone +49 (89) 41 29-0 Mühldorfstraße 15 · D-81671 München Fax +49 (89) 41 29-121 64 ◆ Service Locations P.O.Box 80 14 69 ·...

  • Page 17: Online Help

    R&S FSL Documentation Overview Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R&S FSL is divided as follows: • Quick Start Guide • Online Help • Operating Manual • Internet Site • Service Manual • Release Notes Quick Start Guide This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD. It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument.

  • Page 18: Service Manual

    Documentation Overview R&S FSL In this manual, all instrument functions are described in detail. For additional information on default settings and parameters, refer to the data sheets. The set of measurement examples in the Quick Start Guide is expanded by more advanced measurement examples. In addition to the brief introduction to remote control in the Quick Start Guide, a description of the commands and programming examples is given.
  • Page 19 R&S FSL Conventions Used in the Documentation Conventions Used in the Documentation To visualize important information quickly and to recognize information types faster, a few conventions has been introduced. The following character formats are used to emphasize words: Bold All names of graphical user interface elements as dialog boxes, softkeys, lists, options, buttons etc.

  • Page 20: Putting Into Operation

    R&S FSL Putting into Operation Putting into Operation For details refer to the Quick Start Guide chapters 1, "Front and Rear Panel", and 2, "Preparing for Use". 1300.2519.12 E-11...
  • Page 21 Putting into Operation R&S FSL 1300.2519.12 E-11...

  • Page 22: Table Of Contents

    R&S FSL Advanced Measurement Examples Contents of Chapter 2 Advanced Measurement Examples ............. 2.1 Test Setup ............................2.2 Measurement of Harmonics ......................2.2 High–Sensitivity Harmonics Measurements ................2.4 Measuring the Spectra of Complex Signals ..................2.6 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth ........2.6 Intermodulation Measurements ....................2.7 Measurement example –...
  • Page 23 Advanced Measurement Examples R&S FSL Analog TV Basics ........................2.47 Analog TV Measurement Examples ..................2.48 Analog TV settings......................2.48 Analog TV test setup.....................2.49 Spectrum measurement....................2.50 Carriers measurement ....................2.51 Video Scope measurement...................2.52 Vision Modulation measurement ..................2.53 Hum measurement .......................2.55 C/N measurement......................2.56 CSO measurement .......................2.60 CTB measurement......................2.63 Digital TV Basics........................2.65 Digital TV Measurement Examples ..................2.70...
  • Page 24 R&S FSL Advanced Measurement Examples Behavior with incorrect scrambling code ..............2.113 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power Triggered ............2.113 Trigger offset.......................2.114 Setup for Base Station Tests ....................2.115 Standard test setup.....................2.115 Basic settings ......................2.115 CDMA2000 Base Station Measurements (Option K82).............2.116 Measuring the Signal Channel Power ..................2.116 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask ................2.118 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and the Frequency Error ........2.119 Synchronization of the reference frequencies ............2.121...
  • Page 25 Advanced Measurement Examples R&S FSL IQ Impairments ......................2.152 RSSI..........................2.152 CINR ...........................2.153 Literature ........................2.153 Signal Processing of the IEEE802.16–2005 OFDMA/WiBro Measurement Application..2.153 Introduction .........................2.155 Signal Processing Block Diagram................2.155 Synchronization ......................2.156 Channel Estimation / Equalization ................2.156 Analysis........................2.157 Literature ........................2.158 1300.2519.12 I-2.4 E-11...

  • Page 26: Advanced Measurement Examples

    R&S FSL Advanced Measurement Examples Advanced Measurement Examples This chapter explains how to operate the R&S FSL using typical measurements as examples. Additional background information on the settings is given. Examples of more basic character are provided in the Quick Start Guide, chapter 5, as an introduction. The following topics are included in the Quick Start Guide: •...

  • Page 27: Test Setup

    Test Setup R&S FSL Test Setup All of the following examples are based on the standard settings of the R&S FSL. These are set with the PRESET key. A complete listing of the standard settings can be found in chapter "Instrument Functions", section "Initializing the Configuration –...
  • Page 28 R&S FSL Measurement of Harmonics As shown in Fig. 2-1, the level of the 2 harmonic drops by 20 dB if the level of the fundamental wave is reduced by 10 dB. Level display / dBm 2nd harmonic intercept point / 1st harmonic 2nd harmonic RF level...

  • Page 29: High-Sensitivity Harmonics Measurements

    Measurement of Harmonics R&S FSL Note: If the harmonic emerges from noise sufficiently (approx. >15 dB), it is easy to check (by changing the RF attenuation) whether the harmonics originate from the DUT or are generated internally by the spectrum analyzer. If a harmonic originates from the DUT, its level remains constant if the RF attenuation is increased by 10 dB.
  • Page 30 R&S FSL Measurement of Harmonics The mode changes from phase noise measurement to reference fixed, the marker readout changes from dB/Hz to dB. Fig. 2-2 Fundamental wave and the frequency and level reference point 5. Make the step size for the center frequency equal to the signal frequency Press the FREQ key.

  • Page 31: Measuring The Spectra Of Complex Signals

    Measuring the Spectra of Complex Signals R&S FSL The delta marker moves to the maximum of the 2 harmonic. The displayed level result is relative to the reference point level (= fundamental wave level). Fig. 2-3 Measuring the level difference between the fundamental wave (= reference point level) and the 2 harmonic The other harmonics are measured with steps 5 and 6, the center frequency being incremented or...

  • Page 32: Intermodulation Measurements

    R&S FSL Measuring the Spectra of Complex Signals The higher spectral resolution with smaller bandwidths is won by longer sweep times for the same span. The sweep time has to allow the resolution filters to settle during a sweep at all signal levels and frequencies to be displayed.
  • Page 33 Measuring the Spectra of Complex Signals R&S FSL The intermodulation product at f is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal P signal P , the intermodulation product at f by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal P and signal = 2 x f –...

  • Page 34: Measurement Example - Measuring The R&S Fsl's Intrinsic Intermodulation

    R&S FSL Measuring the Spectra of Complex Signals Measurement example – Measuring the R&S FSL's intrinsic intermodulation Test setup: Signal Generator 1 Coupler R&S FSL [- 6 dB] Signal Generator 2 Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU): Level Frequency Signal generator 1 –4 dBm 999.7 MHz Signal generator 2...
  • Page 35 Measuring the Spectra of Complex Signals R&S FSL 5. Measuring intermodulation by means of the 3 order intercept measurement function Press the MEAS key. Press the TOI softkey. The R&S FSL activates four markers for measuring the intermodulation distance. Two markers are positioned on the useful signals and two on the intermodulation products.
  • Page 36 R&S FSL Measuring the Spectra of Complex Signals Fig. 2-7 If the RF attenuation is increased, the R&S FSL's intrinsic intermodulation products disappear below the noise floor. Calculation method: The method used by the R&S FSL to calculate the intercept point takes the average useful signal level in dBm and calculates the intermodulation d in dB as a function of the average value of the levels of the two intermodulation products.
  • Page 37 Measuring the Spectra of Complex Signals R&S FSL Distortion free Dynamic Range (1 MHz carrier offset RWB = 1 kHz T.O.I. RWB = 100 Hz RWB = 10 Hz Thermal Noise -100 + Phase Noise -110 -120 Mixer level /dBm Fig.

  • Page 38: Measuring Signals In The Vicinity Of Noise

    R&S FSL Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise Note: If the intermodulation products of a DUT with a very high dynamic range are to be measured and the resolution bandwidth to be used is therefore very small, it is best to measure the levels of the useful signals and those of the intermodulation products separately using a small span.

  • Page 39: Measurement Example - Measuring Level At Low S/N Ratios

    Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise R&S FSL Measurement example – Measuring level at low S/N ratios The example shows the different factors influencing the S/N ratio. Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU): Frequency: 128 MHz Level: – 80 dBm Procedure: 1.
  • Page 40 R&S FSL Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise Press the Average softkey. The traces of consecutive sweeps are averaged. To perform averaging, the R&S FSL automatically switches on the sample detector. The RF signal, therefore, can be more clearly distinguished from noise.
  • Page 41 Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise R&S FSL 6. By reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 10, the noise is reduced by 10 dB. Press the Res BW Manual softkey and enter 300 kHz. The displayed noise is reduced by approx. 10 dB. The signal, therefore, emerges from noise by about 10 dB.

  • Page 42: Noise Measurements

    R&S FSL Noise Measurements Noise Measurements Noise measurements play an important role in spectrum analysis. Noise e.g. affects the sensitivity of radio communication systems and their components. Noise power is specified either as the total power in the transmission channel or as the power referred to a bandwidth of 1 Hz.
  • Page 43 Noise Measurements R&S FSL 5. The measurement result is stabilized by averaging the trace. Press the TRACE key. Press the Trace Mode key. Press the Average softkey. The R&S FSL performs sliding averaging over 10 traces from consecutive sweeps. The measurement result becomes more stable.

  • Page 44: Measurement Of Noise Power Within A Transmission Channel

    R&S FSL Noise Measurements Example The measured internal noise power of the R&S FSL at an attenuation of 0 dB is found to be –143 dBm/1 Hz. The noise figure of the R&S FSL is obtained as follows NF = –143 + 174 = 31 dB Note: If noise power is measured at the output of an amplifier, for example, the sum of the internal noise power and the noise power at the output of the DUT is measured.

  • Page 45: 1.23 Mhz Channel Bandwidth With The Channel Power Function

    Noise Measurements R&S FSL Measurement example – Measuring the intrinsic noise of the R&S FSL at 1 GHz in a 1.23 MHz channel bandwidth with the channel power function Test setup: Leave the RF input of the R&S FSL open–circuited or terminate it with 50 Procedure: 1.
  • Page 46 R&S FSL Noise Measurements Fig. 2-15 Measurement of the R&S FSL's intrinsic noise power in a 1.23 MHz channel bandwidth. 5. Stabilizing the measurement result by increasing the sweep time Press the H key twice. The main menu for channel and adjacent channel power measurement is displayed. Press the Sweep Time softkey and enter 1 s.
  • Page 47 Noise Measurements R&S FSL The following steps are performed: • The linear power of all the trace pixels within the channel is calculated. /10) = 10 where P = power of the trace pixel i = displayed level of trace point i •...

  • Page 48: Measuring Phase Noise

    R&S FSL Noise Measurements The curves in Fig. 2-17 indicate the repeatability obtained with a probability of 95% and 99% depending on the number of samples used. The repeatability with 600 samples is ± 0.5 dB. This means that – if the sample detector and a channel bandwidth over the whole diagram (channel bandwidth = span) is used –...
  • Page 49 Noise Measurements R&S FSL 2. Set the center frequency to 100 MHz and the span to 50 kHz. Press the FREQ key and enter 100 MHz. Press the SPAN key and enter 50 kHz. 3. Set the R&S FSL's reference level to 0 dBm (=signal generator level). Press the AMPT key and enter 0 dBm.

  • Page 50: Measurements On Modulated Signals

    R&S FSL Measurements on Modulated Signals Measurements on Modulated Signals For measurements on AM and FM signals refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 5, "Basic Measurements Examples". Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power Measuring channel power and adjacent channel power is one of the most important tasks in the field of digital transmission for a spectrum analyzer with the necessary test routines.

  • Page 51: Measurement Example 1 - Acpr Measurement On An Cdma 2000 Signal

    Measurements on Modulated Signals R&S FSL Measurement example 1 – ACPR measurement on an CDMA 2000 signal Test setup: Signal R&S FSL generator Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU): Frequency: 850 MHz Level: 0 dBm Modulation: CDMA 2000 Procedure: 1. Set the R&S FSL to its default state. Press the PRESET key.
  • Page 52 R&S FSL Measurements on Modulated Signals 5. Set the optimal reference level and RF attenuation for the applied signal level. Press the Adjust Ref Level softkey. The R&S FSL sets the optimal RF attenuation and the reference level based on the transmission channel power to obtain the maximum dynamic range.
  • Page 53 Measurements on Modulated Signals R&S FSL ACPR Repeatability IS95 IBW Method Adjacent channels Alternate channels Tx channel 1000 Sweep time/ms Fig. 2-20 Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurement on CDMA 2000 standard signals if the integration bandwidth method is used 6.
  • Page 54 R&S FSL Measurements on Modulated Signals ACPR IS95 Re pe atability 0,35 0,25 Adjacent channels 0,15 Tx channel Alternate channels 0,05 1000 Sweep tim e/m s Fig. 2-22 Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurements on CDMA 2000 signals in the fast ACP mode Note on adjacent channel power measurements on 2000 MC1 base–station signals: When measuring the adjacent channel power of 2000 MC1 base–station signals, the frequency spacing of the adjacent channel to the nominal transmit channel is specified as ±750 kHz.

  • Page 55: Measurement Example 2 - Measuring Adjacent Channel Power Of A W-Cdma Uplink Signal

    Measurements on Modulated Signals R&S FSL The following figure shows the passband characteristics of the 30 kHz channel filter in the R&S FSL. Fig. 2-23 Frequency response of the 30 kHz channel filter for measuring the power in the 2000 MC1 adjacent channel Measurement example 2 –...
  • Page 56 R&S FSL Measurements on Modulated Signals 3. Switch on the ACP measurement for W–CDMA. Press the MEAS key. Press the CP, ACP, MC–ACP softkey. Press the CP / ACP Standard softkey. In the standards list, mark W–CDMA 3GPP REV using the rotary knob or the arrow keys and confirm pressing the rotary knob or the ENTER key.
  • Page 57 Measurements on Modulated Signals R&S FSL Fig. 2-25 Measuring the adjacent channel power of a W–CDMA signal with the fast ACP mode Note: With W–CDMA, the R&S FSL's dynamic range for adjacent channel measurements is limited by the 12–bit A/D converter. The greatest dynamic range is, therefore, obtained with the IBW method.

  • Page 58: Amplitude Distribution Measurements

    R&S FSL Measurements on Modulated Signals The level of the W–CDMA signal at the input mixer is shown on the horizontal axis, i.e. the measured signal level minus the selected RF attenuation. The individual components which contribute to the power in the adjacent channel and the resulting relative level (total ACPR) in the adjacent channel are displayed on the vertical axis.

  • Page 59: Measurement Example - Measuring The Apd And Ccdf Of White Noise Generated By The R&S Fsl

    Measurements on Modulated Signals R&S FSL Measurement example – Measuring the APD and CCDF of white noise generated by the R&S FSL 1. Set the R&S FSL to its default state. Press the PRESET key. The R&S FSL is in its default state. 2.
  • Page 60 R&S FSL Measurements on Modulated Signals Fig. 2-28 CCDF of white noise The CCDF trace indicates the probability that a level will exceed the mean power. The level above the mean power is plotted along the x–axis of the graph. The origin of the axis corresponds to the mean power level.

  • Page 61: Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8)

    Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) This section gives background information on Bluetooth Measurements (option K8). It provides information on the following topics: Bluetooth Overview Supported Tests Overview of Transmitter Tests Functional Description – Block Diagram Bandwidths Measurement Filter (Meas Filter On) Oversampling...

  • Page 62: Bluetooth Technical Parameters

    R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Bluetooth technical parameters Table 2–1 Common Parameters frequency bands 2402 + (0...78) MHz channel spacing 1 MHz symbol rate 1 Msym/s slot length 625 µsec (frequency hopping) packet sizes 1, 3, 5 slot packets Table 2–2 Modulation Parameters Basic Rate modulation GFSK...

  • Page 63: Structure Of A Bluetooth Data Packet

    Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Structure of a Bluetooth data packet Every Bluetooth data packet is divided into 3 basic section: access code, header and payload. The following figures show the order and bit lengths of the individual sections: access code 72 bits 54 bits 240 / 1496 / 2744 bits...

  • Page 64: Overview Of Transmitter Tests

    R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Overview of Transmitter Tests Table 2–4 Basic Rate Measurements Output Power TX Output Modulation Initial Carrier Carrier Spectrum – Characteristics Frequency Frequency Adjacent Tolerance Drift Channel Power on / off on / off Trigger extern –...

  • Page 65: Functional Description - Block Diagram

    Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Table 2–5 Enhanced Data Rate Measurements EDR Relative TX EDR Carrier EDR Differential EDR In–band Power Frequency Phase Encoding Spurious Stability and Emissions Modulation Accuracy Trigger – – – extern/ IF power Synchronization yes, needed for gate adjustment Packet Type longest supported...

  • Page 66: Bandwidths

    R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) The measurements are performed by passing the following signal processing steps: LAP (Lower Address Part) trigger detection Resampling Channel filtering Automated packet and bit pattern detection Limit check Parallel display of measurement curves and numeric results on the screen Fig.

  • Page 67: Oversampling

    Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL the displayed deviation value is increased by 3.2%, but without the filter the displayed deviation value can increase dramatically due to interference from adjacent channels. Generally the result is more precise, if the displayed deviation is lower with filtering than without filtering. In these cases the inaccuracy caused by the adjacent channel interference is higher than the systematic inaccuracy caused by the filter.

  • Page 68: Determining Average Or Max/Min Values

    R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Sampling times before timing offset correction Sampling times after timing offset correction Fig. 2-31 Operation of the timing offset correction Advantages of the timing offset correction: No jitter with low sampling rates With one sample per zero, the trespassing point is always a sample in the middle of the bit length. Therefore the maximum values in the frequency deviation of 0101 bit patterns can be detected precisely also with low sampling rates.

  • Page 69: Impact Of The Sweep Count On The Measurement Results

    Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Impact of the sweep count on the measurement results Trace Mode Continuous Sweep Single Sweep & Sweep Count Clear Write All measurement results (min., max., Starts a measurement with n sweeps (n average) are updated with every sweep. = sweep count).
  • Page 70 R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Therefore varying measurement results is possible if the power of the EUT is not constant within the burst. In order to supply stable synchronization the EUT must be operated in reduced hopping mode. The EUT is only allowed to toggle between two frequencies, because otherwise the repetition time for the same frequency would become higher than the record length.

  • Page 71: Cable Tv Measurements (Option K20)

    Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) This section describes measurement examples for the Cable TV Measurements option (K20). and is divided into the following topics: Analog TV Basics gives an introduction into the fundamentals of analog modulated TV signals. Analog TV Measurement Examples describes the test setup, settings for analog TV measurements and gives examples for the different measurement type.

  • Page 72: Analog Tv Basics

    R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Analog TV Basics This section gives an introduction into the fundamentals of analog modulated TV signals. A special focus is laid on the parameters that the Cable TV Measurements option (K20) uses to characterize signals.

  • Page 73: Analog Tv Measurement Examples

    Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL The large diversity of TV standards based on PAL, SECAM und NTSC differ not only in the parameter described above. Some other parameter are for example: • number of picture lines and their duration •...

  • Page 74: Analog Tv Test Setup

    R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) • Color System: The color information of the video signal is transmitted according to either the PAL or NTSC or SECAM standard. The values you can choose depend on the selected TV standard. Not all combinations are allowed! •...

  • Page 75: Spectrum Measurement

    Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL 5. If you use an analog TV test transmitter, configure it to transmit a suitable signal: Choose a reasonable, not too high output level. Set the transmitters's vision carrier frequency to 210.25 MHz. 6.

  • Page 76: Carriers Measurement

    R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Fig. 2-33 Analog TV Spectrum measurement Carriers measurement This measurement determines the carrier power (vision carrier, one or two sound carriers) and the frequency distances. It also compares them against the default values. The sound carrier power is displayed relative to the measured vision carrier power.

  • Page 77: Video Scope Measurement

    Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL In the measurement example, all results were within the chosen limits, except the absolute power of the vision carrier. This is indicated by red color and a star. Fig. 2-34 Analog TV Carriers measurement Note: The "frequency offsets'' are measured in this way: For sound carriers:...

  • Page 78: Vision Modulation Measurement

    R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) 6. Press the Line softkey to enter the line number. 7. To change the sweep time, press the Sweeptime Manual softkey and enter a value (25Rs up to 100 Rs). 8. To define a trigger offset, press the Trigger Offset softkey and enter a value (–50 Rs up to 50 Rs). Choose 0 Rs to make the display start with the horizontal sync of the specified line.
  • Page 79 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Test setup: Refer to the section Analog TV test setup. Procedure: 1. Press the MEAS key. 2. Press the Analog TV softkey. 3. Press the More softkey. 4. Press the Vision Modulation softkey. 5.

  • Page 80: Hum Measurement

    R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Hum measurement This measurement determines whether the signal comprises hum, a not–wanted amplitude modulation of the analog TV signal, mostly due to defective amplifiers. For the Hum measurement, the AM modulated frequency must be below 1 kHz and is typically equal to the power line frequency times one or two, e.g.

  • Page 81: C/N Measurement

    Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL C/N measurement This measurement determines the ratio of signal power and noise power (carrier to noise), a very important figure of merit. The signal power is normally the peak power of the modulated vision carrier, which is the power of the unmodulated vision carrier.
  • Page 82 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) 13. Turn off the test transmitter or remove the cable when prompted and confirm by pressing the ENTER key. The R&S FSL will measure the noise sweeping with a small resolution filter in the span specified in the C/N Setup dialog box.
  • Page 83 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL 10. Press the C/N Setup softkey to open the C/N Setup dialog box. Make sure, that In–Service is chosen as measurement mode. Set the Reference Noise Bandwidth to 5 MHz (or another value). Specify the span for the noise measurement: Change the CF value, which denotes the middle of the span relative to the vision carrier and the Span value in this table.
  • Page 84 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) C/N Quiet Line measurement Test setup: Refer to the section Analog TV test setup. Procedure: 1. Press the SWEEP key. 2. Press the Single Sweep softkey. 3. Press the FREQ key. 4. Enter 210.25 MHz for the vision carrier frequency of the input signal. 5.

  • Page 85: Cso Measurement

    Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Fig. 2-40 C/N Quiet Line measurement The lower pane shows the final C/N ratio and whether it is passed or failed. It also shows the most important correction factors used to calculate the C/N ratio. In Quiet Line mode the noise reading will be not as accurate as in Off–Service mode, due to the still active channel.
  • Page 86 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) 5. Press the MEAS key. 6. Press the Analog TV softkey. 7. Press the CSO softkey. 8. To change the limits, press the Edit Table softkey. 9. To adjust the input attenuator, press the Adjust Attenuation softkey. 10.
  • Page 87 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Fig. 2-41 CSO Off–Service measurement The lower pane shows the final C/N ratio and whether it is passed or failed. It also shows the most important correction factors used to calculate the CSO ratio. The Off–Service mode is the most accurate way to measure CSO, but you must turn off the active channel.

  • Page 88: Ctb Measurement

    R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) 12. A marker is automatically set. Press the MKR key and, using the rotary knob, move the marker to the frequency you want to measure the beat at. You should take care not to measure a CTB beat instead of a CSO beat.
  • Page 89 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Procedure: 1. Press the SWEEP key. 2. Press the Single Sweep softkey. 3. Press the FREQ key. 4. Enter 210.25 MHz for the vision carrier frequency of the input signal. 5. Press the MEAS key. 6.

  • Page 90: Digital Tv Basics

    R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) The lower pane shows the final CTB ratio and whether it is passed or failed. It also shows the most important correction factors used to calculate the CTB ratio. Digital TV Basics Cable TV networks use single carrier QAM signals. These signals are continuously modulated. The Cable TV Measurements option does not support burst signals as used in cable modems (e.g.
  • Page 91 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Fig. 2-45 Pulse signals I (t) and Q (t) for 16QAM dirac dirac Fig. 2-46 16QAM constellation diagram Unfortunately the required bandwidth for transmitting dirac pulses is infinite. Let's reduce the bandwidth by applying a so–called pulse shaping filter (as referred to as TX filters). In most QAM systems root raised cosine filters are used.
  • Page 92 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Fig. 2-47 Root raised cosine filtered dirac signals I (t) and Q We notice that the symbol instants (highlighted with squares) are not on the horizontal lines (possible symbol levels) anymore. This is due to the inter–symbol interference introduced by the root raised cosine TX filter.
  • Page 93 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Fig. 2-48 Raised cosine filtered dirac signals I (t) and Q Let us get back to the ideal transmitter from Fig. 2-44. The next task is to modulate the base band signals (t) and Q (t) onto a carrier.
  • Page 94 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) n(t) Filter cos[2 (f + f)t+ (t)] Binary Symbol Channel Source Mapping Filter Fig. 2-50 Real–world QAM transmitter and distortion model Fig. 2-50 shows the transmitter and distortion model assumed by the measurement demodulator of the Cable TV Measurements option.

  • Page 95: Digital Tv Measurement Examples

    Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL If the transmitter's (DUT) local oscillator does not provide the exact nominal carrier frequency (CF), a carrier frequency error results. The carrier frequency error is displayed in the result table of the Overview measurement.

  • Page 96: Digital Tv Settings

    R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Measurements of the first group can also be done in the Spectrum Analyzer mode. The advantage of the measurements of the Cable TV Measurements option is that they are automatically parameterized with information according to the channel table and the modulation standards. Measurements of this type are: Spectrum measurement Channel Power measurement...

  • Page 97: Digital Tv Test Setup

    Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Digital TV test setup Perform all measurement examples in the Cable TV Analyzer mode. Use a digital TV generator as signal source. Connect the generator directly to the R&S FSL. Set the TV generator to the following parameters: center frequency = 100 MHz single carrier 64QAM modulation.

  • Page 98: Overview Measurement

    R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) The spectrum of the input signal is displayed. Fig. 2-52 Digital TV Spectrum measurement Overview measurement This measurement determines the modulation accuracy of a digitally modulated single carrier QAM signals. The measurement results are checked against the limits and displayed in a table. In this table, only the important result parameters of digital TV signals are displayed.
  • Page 99 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Parameter Description Definition EVM (rms) root mean square of error vector magnitude EVM (peak) peak of error vector magnitude Carrier Frequency frequency offset between the Offset received digital TV signal and the frequency setting Symbol Rate Offset frequency offset between the measured symbol rate of the...

  • Page 100: Constellation Diagram Measurement (Modulation Analysis)

    R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) The result of the measurement is shown below. Fig. 2-53 Digital TV Overview measurement 8. To form the average over a defined number of sweeps: Press the TRACE key. Press the Result Mode softkey and select the Average trace mode. Press the Sweep Count softkey and enter the number of sweeps used for averaging.

  • Page 101: Modulation Errors Measurement (Modulation Analysis)

    Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL 6. To display the constellation diagram unchanged, while the I/Q samples are collected in the background, press the Freeze softkey. To switch back to the continual update of the display, press the Freeze softkey again. 7.
  • Page 102 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Parameter Description Definition Phase Jitter (rms) Root mean square of phase jitter in deg. An ideal IQ mixer results in 0 deg. Test setup: Refer to the section Digital TV test setup. Procedure: 1.

  • Page 103: Echo Pattern Measurement (Channel Analysis)

    Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Echo Pattern measurement (channel analysis) This measurement determines the magnitude of the channel impulse response in respect to the corresponding time delay. Damage of TV cables causes unwanted reflections of the TV signal. These reflections lead to echoes in the TV receiver.

  • Page 104: Channel Power Measurement

    R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Please note that the Echo Pattern can also be measured with the equalizer switched off. As long as there are only few decision errors in the QAM demodulator this will lead to the same echo pattern. Press the PREVIOUS key twice to go two menu levels up.

  • Page 105: Apd Measurement

    Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Fig. 2-57 Digital TV Channel Power measurement APD measurement This measurement determines the amplitude probability density function (APD). The measurement can also be performed in Spectrum Analyzer mode, but in the Cable TV Analyzer mode most of the parameters are set automatically.

  • Page 106: Ccdf Measurement

    R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Fig. 2-58 Digital TV APD measurement CCDF measurement This measurement determines the complementary cumulative distribution function (CCDF) of the complex base band signal. The measurement can also be performed in Spectrum Analyzer mode, but in the Cable TV Analyzer mode most of the parameters are set automatically.

  • Page 107: Tv Analyzer Measurements

    Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Fig. 2-59 Digital TV CCDF measurement TV Analyzer Measurements The measurement here is set up to carry out multiple channel measurements of TV networks. The measurement provides a fast, automatic change of the measurement channel in order to support a quick succession of measurements.

  • Page 108: Channel Tables And Modulation Standards

    R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Test setup: Connect the R&S FSL to your CATV network. It is not possible to work without a channel table. You cannot even enter the TV Analyzer sub menu, if you have not activated a channel table before. Create a channel table according to you CATV network (or a subset of your network).

  • Page 109: Channel Tables

    Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL channels are marked as < unused >. However, it is not possible to do measurements without any precise information about the services. Therefore the Cable TV Measurements option introduces the concept of the so–called modulation standard. Modulation standards describe the signal characteristics, or physical layer, transmitted via a channel.

  • Page 110: Modulation Standards

    R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) • A Modulation Standard is referenced. In case of an empty channel, the modulation standard is set to < unused >. Be aware that modulation standards have to be created before making use of them.
  • Page 111 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Most important when dealing with modulation standards is the order of the parameters. Modulation standards (see Fig. 2-62) have always to be created and edited from top to bottom of the Modulation Standard Options dialog box. The most important parameters are located at the top of the dialog box. For example, changing the signal type from Analog TV to Digital TV also alters the complete set of parameters below.
  • Page 112 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) The Sound System parameter specifies how the audio will be transmitted. The possible values depend on the TV Standard selected in the TV Standard list. The sound systems are named in the form "sound carrier 1 / sound carrier 2'', e.g. "FM 6.5 / FM 6.258''. Information about the sound modulation format and the carrier frequency with respect to the vision carrier is included.
  • Page 113 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Quiet Line: Some measurements need a horizontal line with no video information in it. You must specify the number of this horizontal line here. For further information see also Example: Creating a channel table.
  • Page 114 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Fig. 2-63 Modulation Standard Options dialog box for digital TV This section describes the parameters that characterize digital cable TV signals. Refer to section Digital TV Basics to learn more about digital TV signals. The parameters discussed here can also be modified (temporarily) in the Digital TV Settings dialog box.

  • Page 115: Example: Creating A Channel Table

    Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL The symbol rate can be entered in MHz. For the roll–off factor, the following values are supported: 0.120 0.130 0.150 0.180 The Sideband Position parameter can be used to invert the sidebands. The following values are supported: Auto Inverse...
  • Page 116 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Enter frequency plan Typically every country has its own regulations concerning the frequency plan, i.e. the channel locations and the channel widths. That is what we call a country–specific frequency plan. Table 2–12 shows the frequency plan of "Bavaria''.
  • Page 117 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL 8. To enter the remaining channels proceed as in step 7 Channel 22: RF = 486 MHz Channel 23: RF = 494 MHz Channel 24: RF = 502 MHz 9. To save your work, press the Save Changes softkey. Having finished the first step, you have build a channel table as shown in Fig.
  • Page 118 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Table 2–14: Digital TV service data for 64QAM_6900 modulation standard Standard QAM J.83/A (DVB–C Europe) Constellation 64QAM Symbol rate 6.9 MSymbols/s Roll–off factor of root raised cosine filter 0.15 Sideband position normal First of all in the second step, we will copy the EXAMPLE BAVARIA channel table to a new channel table EXAMPLE WIPFING.
  • Page 119 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL For the Quiet Line, set Line to 22. That means, that the horizontal line 22 transmits no luminance information. Select Normal as Sideband Postion from the list. The Modulation Standard Options dialog box should now look as in Fig.
  • Page 120 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) 17. Press the Save Changes softkey to save the channel table and the new modulation standard. Fig. 2-67 Digital TV modulation standard 64QAM_6900 We have now finished step two, i.e. the channel table EXAMPLE WIPFING contains a frequency plan, the analog modulation standard PAL_BG_STEREO and the digital modulation standard 64QAM_6900.

  • Page 121: Example: Restoring The Default Channel Tables

    Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Fig. 2-68 Digital Channel table "EXAMPLE WIPFING'' We now have sucessfully finished the creation of the channel table "EXAMPLE WIPFING''. Please refer to section Performing a Measurement without a Channel Table to learn more about measurements based on a channel table.
  • Page 122 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Test setup: Connect a analog TV generator to your R&S FSL. Set the TV generator to send an analog TV PAL B/G signal with a vision carrier frequency of 210.25 MHz. Procedure: 1. Press the MENU key. 2.

  • Page 123: Performing A Measurement Using A Channel Table

    Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL In practice you would now continue to adapt the modulation settings in depth, i.e. the sound system the test lines and so on. For our example we will stop here. For further details on analog TV modulation parameters please refer to section Analog TV settings Performing a Measurement Using a Channel Table The use of a channel table can speed up most of the routine measurement tasks.
  • Page 124 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Fig. 2-70 Carriers measurement using a Channel Table. No input signal! 8. Press the Channel No softkey. 9. Input a channel number via the numeric keyboard. The Cable TV Measurements option will only allow analog TV channels defined in the active channel table, since we are in a measurement for analog TV channels and digital TV signals would not make sense! The same is true when you use the rotary knob for changing the measurement channel.
  • Page 125 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Fig. 2-71 Digital TV spectrum using a Channel Table. No input signal! 13. Press the Channel No softkey. 14. Choose one of the digital TV channels that are present in the channel table, because we are in a measurement designed for digital TV signals.

  • Page 126: Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30)

    R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) The use of a channel table is mandatory for the Tilt measurement. Because the Cable TV Measurements option must know where a channel's power has to be measured and how it has to be done.
  • Page 127 Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) R&S FSL 3. Press the ENR Settings softkey to open the ENR dialog box. In the ENR Constant field, enter the average ENR value of the used noise source for the frequency range of interest, for example 15 dB. 4.

  • Page 128: Duts With Very Large Gain

    R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) 4. Start the calibration for the Noise Figure Measurements option. Press the SWEEP key. Press the Cal softkey. The progress bar indicates the progress of the calibration measurement. After successful calibration, in the status bar, a corresponding message is displayed and the title bar at the top of the screen shows the status on the right–hand–side.

  • Page 129: Frequency-Converting Measurements

    Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) R&S FSL Fig. 2-75: Calibration and measurement on DUTs with a high gain Frequency–Converting Measurements The frequency–converting measurement is used for DUTs with an output frequency that differs from the input frequency, e.g. mixers and frequency converters. The frequency–converting measurement allows many variations, which differ from each other in two criteria: Fixed LO Measurements Image–Frequency Rejection (SSB, DSB)
  • Page 130 R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) Image freq. If a DUT, which equally converts the useful signal and the image to the IF frequency, is measured using the conventional y factor method or with the 2nd stage correction switched on, a measuring error of 3 dB is produced.
  • Page 131 Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) R&S FSL Measurement on a mixer with an average sideband suppression Image freq. For measurements on a mixer with a low image–frequency rejection, a measuring error of 0 to 3 dB is obtained if the image–frequency rejection is not taken into account. In this case, set the image rejection in the Frequency Settings dialog box to 4 dB to produce the correct results.
  • Page 132 R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) the noise source is not converted by a further receive path of the mixer. The noise of the noise source at the receive frequency must not be reduced. The insertion loss must be considered, if applicable. With this test setup, the measurement on a mixer without sideband suppression corresponds to the measurement on a single–sideband mixer.

  • Page 133: 3Gpp Base Station Measurements (Option K72)

    3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) This section explains basic 3GPP FDD base station tests by means of a setup with a signal generator, e.g. an R&S SMU. It describes how operating and measurement errors can be avoided using correct settings.
  • Page 134 R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) Procedure: 1. Set the R&S FSL to its default state. Press the PRESET key. The R&S FSL is set to its default state. 2. Change into the 3G FDD BTS mode. Press the MODE key and activate the 3G FDD BTS option. 3.

  • Page 135: Measuring The Spectrum Emission Mask

    3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) R&S FSL Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask The 3GPP specification defines a measurement that monitors compliance with a spectral mask in a range of at least ±12.5 MHz around the WCDMA carrier. To assess the power emissions in the specified range, the signal power is measured in the range near the carrier by means of a 30 kHz filter, and in the ranges far away from the carrier by means of a 1 MHz filter.

  • Page 136: Measuring The Relative Code Domain Power

    R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) Fig. 2-79 Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power A code domain power measurement on one of the test models (model 1 with 32 channels) is shown in the following. To demonstrate the effects, the basic parameters of the Code Domain Power measurements permitting an analysis of the signal are changed one after the other from values adapted to the measurement signal to non–adapted values.

  • Page 137: Synchronization Of The Reference Frequencies

    3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) R&S FSL 3. Set the center frequency to 2.1175 GHz. Press the FREQ key. The frequency menu is displayed. In the dialog box, enter 2.1175 using the numeric keypad and confirm with the GHz key. 4.

  • Page 138: Behavior With Deviating Center Frequency Setting

    R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) Behavior with deviating center frequency setting In the following, the behavior of the DUT and the R&S FSL with an incorrect center frequency setting is shown. 1. Tune the center frequency of the signal generator in 0.5 kHz steps. 2.

  • Page 139: Trigger Offset

    3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) R&S FSL Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU): Frequency: 2.1175 GHz Level: 0 dBm Standard: WCDMA/3GPP Test model: 1, 32 DPCH channels Procedure: 1. Set the R&S FSL to its default state. Press the PRESET key. The R&S FSL is set to its default state.

  • Page 140: Setup For Base Station Tests

    R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) Setup for Base Station Tests This section describes how to set up the R&S FSL for 3GPP FDD base station tests. As a prerequisite for starting the test, the instrument must be correctly set up and connected to the AC power supply as described in the Quick Start Guide, chapter 1.

  • Page 141: Cdma2000 Base Station Measurements (Option K82)

    CDMA2000 Base Station Measurements (Option K82) R&S FSL CDMA2000 Base Station Measurements (Option K82) This section explains basic CDMA2000 base station tests by means of a setup with a signal generator, e.g. an R&S SMU. It describes how operating and measurement errors can be avoided using correct settings.
  • Page 142 R&S FSL CDMA2000 Base Station Measurements (Option K82) Test setup: Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R&S FSL (coaxial cable with N connectors). Signal generator settings: Frequency: 878.49 MHz Level: 0 dBm Standard: CDMA2000 Procedure:...

  • Page 143: Measuring The Spectrum Emission Mask

    CDMA2000 Base Station Measurements (Option K82) R&S FSL Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask To detect spurious emissions such as harmonics or intermodulation products, the R&S FSL offers a spectrum emission mask measurement. The measurement compares the power against the spurious emissions mask in the range from -4 MHz to 4 MHz around the carrier.

  • Page 144: Measuring The Relative Code Domain Power And The Frequency Error

    R&S FSL CDMA2000 Base Station Measurements (Option K82) Fig. 2-83: Measurement of the Spectrum Emission Mask Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and the Frequency Error A Code Domain Power measurement analyses the signal over a single Power Control Group (PCG). It also determines the power of all channels.
  • Page 145 CDMA2000 Base Station Measurements (Option K82) R&S FSL Procedure: 1. Set the R&S FSL to its default state. Press the PRESET key. 2. Activate the CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer Mode. Press the MODE key and select CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer. 3. Enter the Code Domain Analyzer. Press the MEAS key Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey.

  • Page 146: Synchronization Of The Reference Frequencies

    R&S FSL CDMA2000 Base Station Measurements (Option K82) Fig. 2-84: Measurement of the code domain power without external reference Synchronization of the reference frequencies The frequency error can be reduced by synchronizing the transmitter and the receiver to the same reference frequency.

  • Page 147: Measuring The Triggered Relative Code Domain Power

    CDMA2000 Base Station Measurements (Option K82) R&S FSL Measuring the triggered Relative Code Domain Power If the code domain power measurement is performed without external triggering, a section of the test signal is recorded at an arbitrary point of time and the firmware attempts to detect the start of a power control group (PCG).

  • Page 148: Adjusting The Trigger Offset

    R&S FSL CDMA2000 Base Station Measurements (Option K82) Close the Settings Overview box. In the two screens, the following results are displayed: by default, screen A shows the code domain power of the signal. Compared to the measurement without an external trigger (see previous example), the repetition rate of the measurement increases.

  • Page 149: Measuring The Composite Evm

    CDMA2000 Base Station Measurements (Option K82) R&S FSL 9. Set a PN Offset. – In the Settings Overview dialog box select the Demodulation Settings button. – In the PN Offset field enter 200. Again, screen A shows the CDP measurement, screen B the result summary. In the result summary, the Trigger to Frame result is not correct.
  • Page 150 R&S FSL CDMA2000 Base Station Measurements (Option K82) Signal generator settings: Frequency. 878.49 MHz Level: 0 dBm Standard: CDMA2000 Procedure: 1. Set the R&S FSL to its default state. Press the PRESET key. 2. Activate the CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer Mode. Press the MODE key and select CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer.

  • Page 151: Measuring The Peak Code Domain Error And The Rho Factor

    CDMA2000 Base Station Measurements (Option K82) R&S FSL Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor The Code Domain Error Power describes the quality of the measured signal compared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R&S FSL. In the I-Q plane, the error vector represents the difference of the measured signal and the ideal signal.

  • Page 152: Displaying Rho

    R&S FSL CDMA2000 Base Station Measurements (Option K82) The Settings Overview dialog box is displayed. 6. Set the center frequency and the reference level. In the Settings Overview dialog box select the Frontend button. In the Center Frequency field enter 878.49 MHz. In the Ref Level field enter 0 dBm.
  • Page 153 CDMA2000 Base Station Measurements (Option K82) R&S FSL Standard test setup: EXT REF R&S FSL EXTERNAL REFERENCE EXT TRIGGER RF INPUT SIGNAL EVEN SECOND CLOCK TRIGGER TX SIGNAL EXTERNAL ATTENUATION Connect the antenna output (or TX output) of the base station to the RF input of the R&S FSL. Use power attenuator exhibiting suitable attenuation.

  • Page 154: Wlan Tx Measurements (Option K91/K91N)

    R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91) WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91/K91n) This section describes measurement examples for the WLAN TX Measurements option (K91) and gives details to signal processing. For further information on measurement examples refer also to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 5 "Basic Measurement Examples".
  • Page 155 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91) R&S FSL ·kT r(i) " Resampler = 20MHz = 80 MHz = 81.6 MHz ( f ) 16.4 MHz payload frequency user defined window compensation compensation N = 64 measurement estimation pilot gain, frequency, time parameters (PL) table...
  • Page 156 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91) In case of an additive white Gaussian noise (AWGN) channel the FFT is described by [4], [5] common timing phase phase (10) × × × × with the modulation–dependant normalization factor the symbol of sub–carrier k at symbol l , the gain g at the symbol l in relation to the reference gain...
  • Page 157 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91) R&S FSL with being the relative clock deviation of the reference oscillator. Normally a symbol–wise timing jitter is negligible and thus not modeled in equation (12). There may be situations where the timing drift has to be taken into account.
  • Page 158 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91) g ~ and ~ . Finally, the trial parameters leading to the is calculated as a function of the trial parameters g ˆ and ˆ . minimum of the log likelihood function are used as estimates This robust algorithm works well even at low signal to noise ratios with the Cramer Rao Bound being reached.

  • Page 159: Literature

    WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91) R&S FSL Literature Speth, Classen, Meyr: ''Frame synchronization of OFDM systems in frequency selective fading channels", VTC '97, pp. 1807–1811 Schmidl, Cox: ''Robust Frequency and Timing Synchronization of OFDM", IEEE Trans. on Comm., Dec. 1997, pp. 1613–621 Minn, Zeng, Bhargava: ''On Timing Offset Estimation for OFDM", IEEE Communication Letters, July 2000, pp.
  • Page 160 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91) This description gives a rough overview of the signal processing concept of the IEEE 802.11b application. A block diagram of the measurement application is shown in Fig. 2-88. The baseband signal of an IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN system transmitter is sampled with a sampling rate of 44 MHz.
  • Page 161 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91) R&S FSL (17) × × × of a maximum–likelihood–based estimator, where is the over sampled measurement signal, ˆ v the over sampled power normalized and undisturbed reference signal, the observation length, the filter length, the variation parameters of the frequency–, the phase, the IQ–offset and the coefficients of the transmitter filter.
  • Page 162 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91) ( ˆ ( ˆ (23) is the momentary error signal magnitude normalized by the root mean square value of the reference signal power. In [2] a different algorithm is proposed to calculate the error vector magnitude. In a first step the IQ– offset in the I–branch ˆ...

  • Page 163: Literature

    WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91) R&S FSL Literature Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) specifications, IEEE Std 802.11–1999, Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc., 1999. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) specifications: Higher–Speed Physical Layer Extensions in the 2.4 GHz Band, IEEE Std 802.11b–1999, Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc., 1999.

  • Page 164: Comparison To Iq Offset Measurement In K91 List Mode

    R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91) Fig. 2-89 RF carrier suppression measurement Comparison to IQ offset measurement in K91/K91n list mode The IQ offset measurement in K91 returns the actual carrier feed through normalized to the mean power at the symbol timings. This measurement doesn't need a special test signal and is independent of the transmit filter shape.

  • Page 165: Iq Impairments

    WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91) R&S FSL IQ Impairments IQ Offset An IQ–Offset indicates a carrier offset with fixed amplitude. This results in a constant shift of the IQ axes. The offset is normalized by the mean symbol power and displayed in dB. Gain Imbalance An ideal I/Q modulator amplifies the I and Q signal path by exactly the same degree.

  • Page 166: Quadrature Error

    R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91) Quadrature Error An ideal I/Q modulator sets the phase angle to exactly 90 degrees. With a quadrature error, the phase angle between the I and Q vector deviates from the ideal 90 degrees, the amplitudes of both components are of the same size.

  • Page 167: Wimax, Wibro Measurements (Options K92/K93)

    WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) This section describes measurement examples for the WiMAX IEEE 802.16 OFDM, OFDMA Measurements option (R&S FSL–K93) and gives details to signal processing. For further information on measurement examples refer also to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 5 "Basic Measurement Examples". The WiMAX IEEE 802.16 OFDM, OFDMA Measurements option (R&S FSL–K92/K93) includes the functionality of the WiMAX 802.16 OFDM Measurements option (R&S FSL–K92).
  • Page 168 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) In the Frequency field, enter the desired frequency to measure. If a frequency is entered, which maps to a specific channel, the Channel No field updates. In the Frequency Band field, select the signal to be analyzed. The target band is either one of the bands given as example in the IEEE 802.16–2004 standard or an unspecified band.

  • Page 169: Performing The Level Detection

    WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL In the Link Mode field, select the link mode of the bursts to be analyzed. In the Demodulator field, select the used modulation scheme. Performing the level detection 1. Connect the DUT to the RF input of the R&S FSL. 2.

  • Page 170: Signal Processing Of The Ieee 802.16-2004 Ofdm Measurement Application

    R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Signal Processing of the IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM Measurement Application Abbreviation Description FFT length symbol from the alphabet at symbol–index l of sub carrier k error vector magnitude of sub carrier k error vector magnitude of current packet signal gain frequency deviation between Tx and Rx symbol index...
  • Page 171 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Fig. 2-90 Signal processing of the IEEE 802.16 OFDM measurement application In the lower part of the figure the subsequent digital signal processing is shown. In the first block the packet search is performed. This block detects the Short Preamble (SP) and recovers the timing. The coarse timing is detected first.
  • Page 172 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) the symbol index symbols the channel index In case of an additive white Gaussian noise (AWGN) channel the FFT is described by [4], [5] commom timing phase phase (30) with the modulation–dependent normalization factor the alphabet symbol at symbol–index l of sub–carrier k the gain...
  • Page 173 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL compensated from the pilots. Therefore the "symbol wise phase tracking'' (Tracking Phase) is activated as the default setting of the R&S FSL–K92/K93. Furthermore the timing drift in equation (29) is given by timing phase (32) with...

  • Page 174: Analysis Steps

    R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) & (34) is derived by averaging the squared EVM versus k . Finally the average error vector magnitude packets counter packets counter (35) is calculated by averaging the packet EVM of all nof _ packets detected packets.

  • Page 175: Subchannelization

    WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Subchannelization Subchannelization can be used in uplink bursts to allocate only a subset of the available OFDM sub carriers. The measurement software can distinguish between downlink bursts, uplink bursts without subchannelization and uplink bursts with a selectable subchannel index. Thus it is possible to analyze the complete WirelessMAN traffic with one capture buffer shot.

  • Page 176: Frequency And Clock Offset

    R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Frequency and Clock Offset The measurement software allows selectable compensation of phase, timing and gain errors based on pilot estimations. However, in case of subchannelization the number of pilots is decreased. Bursts with odd subchannel indices do not provide pilots at all.

  • Page 177: Iq Impairments

    WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL IQ Impairments IQ imbalance in an OFDM transmitter or receiver leads to an interference of the symbols with the symbols . In case of subchannelization, the used sub carriers are always situated in such a way, that &...

  • Page 178: Cinr

    R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) CINR See [6] section "8.3.9.3 CINR mean and standard deviation''. The result summary provides the Carrier Interference Noise Ratio [CINR] statistics according to the standard. One possible method to estimate the CINR of a single message is to compute the ratio of the sum of signal power and the sum of residual error for each data sample, using equation [6] (92).
  • Page 179 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Symbol Description subcarrier index (general, pilot, data, subchannel n ) OFDM symbol index length of FFT number of samples in cyclic prefix (guard interval) number of Nyquist samples number of subcarriers subchannel index, subframe index noise sample common phase error ˆ...

  • Page 180: Introduction

    R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Introduction The following description provides a brief overview of the digital signal processing used in the IEEE 802.16 OFDMA measurement application. From the received IF signal as the point of origin to the actual analysis results like EVM or CINR, the digital signal processing can be divided into four major groups: •...

  • Page 181: Synchronization

    WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Synchronization The first of the synchronization tasks is to detect areas of sufficient power within the captured I/Q data stream. The subframe detection block determines the beginning and end of each subframe and coarsely estimates both timing and carrier frequency offset.

  • Page 182: Analysis

    R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Analysis The analysis block of the OFDMA measurement application allows to calculate a variety of measurement variables. The most important variable is the error vector magnitude (EVM). 2 2 2 ˆ (37) ˆ on subcarrier k at OFDM symbol l .

  • Page 183: Literature

    WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL RSSI The received signal strength indicator is determined for each subframe n . The computation is based on the time domain samples ) (i extracted by the subframe detection block. RSSI (44) Further RSSI statistics are defined in the standard [5], [6]. RSSI µ...
  • Page 184 R&S FSL Manual Operation Manual Operation For details refer to the Quick Start Guide chapter 4, "Basic Operations". 1300.2519.12 E-11...
  • Page 185 R&S FSL Instrument Functions Contents of Chapter 4 Instrument Functions – Analyzer....................4.1 Measurement Parameters........................4.2 Initializing the Configuration – PRESET Key................4.3 Selecting the Frequency and Span – FREQ Key ...............4.5 Setting the Frequency Span – SPAN Key ................4.11 Setting the Level Display and Configuring the RF Input – AMPT Key ........4.13 Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time –...

  • Page 186: Instrument Functions - Analyzer

    R&S FSL Instrument Functions – Analyzer Instrument Functions – Analyzer In this section, all analyzer functions of the R&S FSL and their application are explained in detail. The basic settings functions are described in section "Instrument Functions – Basic Settings". For every key a table is provided in which all submenus and corresponding commands are listed.

  • Page 187: Measurement Parameters

    Measurement Parameters R&S FSL Measurement Parameters In this section all menus necessary for setting measurement parameters are described. This includes the following topics and keys. For details on changing the mode refer to "Measurement Mode Selection – MODE Key" on page 4.129. •...

  • Page 188: Initializing The Configuration - Preset Key

    R&S FSL Initializing the Configuration – PRESET Key Initializing the Configuration – PRESET Key The PRESET key resets the instrument to the default setting and therefore provides a defined initial state as a known starting point for measurements Note: If the LOCAL LOCKOUT function is active in the remote control mode, the PRESET key is disabled.

  • Page 189: Initial Configuration

    Initializing the Configuration – PRESET Key R&S FSL Initial configuration The initial configuration is selected in a way that the RF input is always protected against overload, provided that the applied signal levels are in the allowed range for the instrument. The parameter set of the initial configuration can be customized by using the Startup Recall softkey in the file menu.

  • Page 190: Selecting The Frequency And Span - Freq Key

    R&S FSL Selecting the Frequency and Span – FREQ Key Selecting the Frequency and Span – FREQ Key The FREQ key is used to specify the frequency axis, and to set the frequency offset and the signal track function. The frequency axis can be specified either by the start and stop frequency or by the center frequency and the span.
  • Page 191 Selecting the Frequency and Span – FREQ Key R&S FSL To specify the frequency axis by the start and stop frequency 1. Press the Start softkey and enter a start frequency. 2. Press the Stop softkey and enter a stop frequency. To specify the frequency axis by the center frequency and the span 3.
  • Page 192 R&S FSL Selecting the Frequency and Span – FREQ Key Softkeys of the frequency menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the frequency menu. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 193 Selecting the Frequency and Span – FREQ Key R&S FSL Start Opens an edit dialog box to define the start frequency. The following range of values is allowed: – span start and span are specified in the data sheet. To help analyze signals located at the end of min, the frequency range, for R&S FSL models with an upper frequency limit of 6 GHz or less, the value is extended by 0.05 GHz for direct entry via the key pad.
  • Page 194 R&S FSL Selecting the Frequency and Span – FREQ Key 0.5*Span (span > 0) Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50% of the span. Remote: FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN Remote: FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 50PCT 0.5*RBW (zero span) Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50% of the resolution bandwidth. Remote: FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK RBW Remote: FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 50PCT x*Span (span >...
  • Page 195 Selecting the Frequency and Span – FREQ Key R&S FSL Frequency Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset. The allowed values range from –100 GHz to 100 GHz. The default setting is 0 Hz.

  • Page 196: Setting The Frequency Span - Span Key

    R&S FSL Setting the Frequency Span – SPAN Key Setting the Frequency Span – SPAN Key The SPAN key is used to set the frequency span to be analyzed. To open the span menu Press the SPAN key. The span menu is displayed. For span > 0 an edit dialog box to enter the frequency is displayed. For zero span, an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time is displayed.
  • Page 197 Setting the Frequency Span – SPAN Key R&S FSL Span Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the frequency span. The center frequency is kept constant. The following range is allowed: span = 0: 0 Hz span >0: span span and span are specified in the data sheet.

  • Page 198: Setting The Level Display And Configuring The Rf Input - Ampt Key

    R&S FSL Setting the Level Display and Configuring the RF Input – AMPT Key Setting the Level Display and Configuring the RF Input – AMPT Key The AMPT key is used to set the reference level, the level range and unit, the scaling and the RF attenuation.
  • Page 199 Setting the Level Display and Configuring the RF Input – AMPT Key R&S FSL To specify the amplitude 1. Set the reference level, offset and position, using the Ref Level, Ref Level Offset and Ref Level Position softkeys. 2. Select the level range and the unit for the level axis, using the Range Log and Unit softkeys. 3.
  • Page 200 R&S FSL Setting the Level Display and Configuring the RF Input – AMPT Key Range Linear Selects linear scaling for the level display range and opens a submenu to select the type of linear scaling. Range Linear % Selects linear scaling in % for the level display range, i.e. the horizontal grid lines are labelled in %.
  • Page 201 Setting the Level Display and Configuring the RF Input – AMPT Key R&S FSL RF Atten Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level. This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used. It is the default setting. Remote: INP:ATT:AUTO ON Ref Level Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset.
  • Page 202 R&S FSL Setting the Level Display and Configuring the RF Input – AMPT Key Input 50 D / 75 D Uses 50 L or 75 L as reference impedance for the measured levels. Default setting is 50 L . Changes the reference impedance for the measured levels The setting 75 L should be selected, if the 50 L input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 L adapter of the RAZ type (= 25 L in series to the input impedance of the instrument).

  • Page 203: Setting The Bandwidths And Sweep Time - Bw Key

    Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key R&S FSL Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key The BW key is used to set the resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth (VBW) and sweep time (SWT). The values available for resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth depend on the selected filter type. For details on channel filters see also "List of available RRC and channel filters"...
  • Page 204 R&S FSL Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key To specify the bandwidth 1. Set the resolution bandwidth using the Res BW Manual or Res BW Auto softkey. 2. Set the video bandwidth using the Video BW Manual or Video BW Auto softkey. 3.
  • Page 205 Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key R&S FSL List of available RRC and channel filters For power measurement a number of especially steep–edged channel filters are available (see the following table). For filters of type RRC (Root Raised Cosine), the filter bandwidth indicated describes the sampling rate of the filter.
  • Page 206 R&S FSL Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application CFILter CDMAone 1.2288 CFILter CDMAone 1,28 CFILter CFILter CFILter 3.75 CFILter 3.84 W-CDMA 3GPP MHz, =0.22* 4.096 W-CDMA NTT DOCoMo MHz, =0.22* CFILter 20 MHz CFILter Note: The 20 MHz channel filter is unavailable in sweep mode.
  • Page 207 Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key R&S FSL Softkeys of the bandwidth menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the bandwidth menu. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 208 R&S FSL Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key Video BW Auto (not available for FFT filter) Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth. If the resolution bandwidth is changed, the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted. This setting is recommended, if a minimum sweep time is required for a selected resolution bandwidth.

  • Page 209: Configuring The Sweep Mode - Sweep Key

    Configuring the Sweep Mode – SWEEP Key R&S FSL Configuring the Sweep Mode – SWEEP Key The SWEEP key is used to configure the sweep mode. Continuous sweep or single sweep are possible. The sweep time and the number of measured values are set. To open the sweep menu Press the SWEEP key.
  • Page 210 R&S FSL Configuring the Sweep Mode – SWEEP Key To specify the sweep settings 1. Press the Sweep Count softkey and enter the sweep count. 2. Set the sweep time by using the Sweeptime Manual or Sweeptime Auto softkey. 3. Press the Sweep Points softkey and enter the number of sweep points. 4.
  • Page 211 Configuring the Sweep Mode – SWEEP Key R&S FSL Continue Single Sweep Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Sweep Count softkey, without deleting the trace of the last measurement. This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging / maximum search.
  • Page 212 R&S FSL Configuring the Sweep Mode – SWEEP Key Sweep Points Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of measured values to be collected during one sweep. – Entry via rotary knob: In the range from 101 to 1001, the sweep points are increased or decreased in steps of 100 points.

  • Page 213: Triggering The Sweep - Trig Key

    Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key R&S FSL Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key The TRIG key is used to set trigger mode, trigger threshold, trigger delay, trigger polarity and for gated sweep the gate configuration. To open the trigger menu Press the TRIG key.
  • Page 214 R&S FSL Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key To specify the trigger settings 1. Press the Trg / Gate Source softkey to select the trigger mode (for details see "Trigger mode overview" on page 4.31). 2. Press the Trg / Gate Level softkey to set the trigger level. 3.
  • Page 215 Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key R&S FSL Fig. 4-1: TDMA signal with GATE OFF Fig. 4-2: Pulsed signal with GATE ON 1300.2519.12 4.30 E-11...
  • Page 216 R&S FSL Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key Fig. 4-3: Timing diagram for GATE, GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH To trigger on TV signals (zero span and option TV Trigger, B6) 1. Press the TV Trig Settings submenu softkey to switch the TV trigger on and define the settings for triggering on TV signal.
  • Page 217 Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key R&S FSL The bandwidth at the intermediate frequency is 20 MHz. The R&S FSL is triggered as soon as the trigger threshold is exceeded within a 10 MHz range around the selected frequency (= start frequency in the frequency sweep).
  • Page 218 R&S FSL Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key Softkeys of the trigger menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the trigger menu. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 219 Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key R&S FSL Trg / Gate Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the trigger / gate level. The gate–related settings are only available with option Gated Sweep, R&S FSL–B8. For details see also "Trigger mode overview"...
  • Page 220 R&S FSL Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key Repetition Intervall (Time Trigger mode) Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time intervall after which the sweep is started. The possible values range from 100 ms to 5000 s. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.60. Remote: TRIG:TIME:RINT 50 Gated Trigger (option Gated Sweep, B8) Switches the sweep mode with gate on or off .
  • Page 221 Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key R&S FSL Gate Delay (option Gated Sweep, B8) Opens an edit dialog box to enter the gate delay time between the gate signal and the continuation of the sweep. Values between 125 ns and 100 s are allowed. The delay position on the time axis in relation to the sweep is indicated by a line labeled GD.
  • Page 222 R&S FSL Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key IF Power Retrigger Hysteresis Opens an edit dialog box to define the value for the IF power trigger hysteresis. This softkey is only available if the IF power trigger is selected as the trigger source. The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must decay below the IF power trigger level in order to allow an IF power trigger starting the measurement.
  • Page 223 Triggering the Sweep – TRIG Key R&S FSL Video Pol Pos/Neg (zero span and option TV Trigger, B6) Sets the polarity of the video signal. Default setting is Neg. Positive video polarity is to be selected e.g. for standard L signals, negative video polarity for signals according to the standards B/G/I/M (color standard PAL or NTSC).

  • Page 224: Setting Traces - Trace Key

    R&S FSL Setting Traces – TRACE Key Setting Traces – TRACE Key The TRACE key is used to configure the data acquisition for measurement and the analysis of the measurement data. The R&S FSL is capable of displaying up to six different traces at a time in a diagram. A trace consists of a maximum of 501 measurement points on the horizontal axis (frequency or time).
  • Page 225 Setting Traces – TRACE Key R&S FSL To specify the trace settings 1. Press the Trace 1 2 3 4 5 6 softkey to select the trace. 2. Press the Trace Mode softkey to select the trace mode for the selected trace (for details see "Trace mode overview"...
  • Page 226 R&S FSL Setting Traces – TRACE Key This mode is not available for statistics measurements or if the TV trigger is active and the TV Free Run On/Off softkey is set to ON (option TV Trigger, B6). • Average The average is formed over several sweeps. All available detectors can be selected. If the detector is automatically selected, the sample detector is used.
  • Page 227 Setting Traces – TRACE Key R&S FSL In continuous sweep mode after the first statistics cycle, continuous averaging is performed. The average trace n is calculated at each measurement point according to: Curr Equ. 4–2 with Avg = average trace; Curr = current trace In single sweep mode, the same formula holds true if the Continue Single Sweep softkey is pressed.
  • Page 228 R&S FSL Setting Traces – TRACE Key If the TV trigger is active, only the auto peak and the sample detector are available. The result obtained from the selected detector within a measurement point is displayed as the power value at this measurement point. All detectors work in parallel in the background, which means that the measurement speed is independent of the detector combination used for different traces.
  • Page 229 Setting Traces – TRACE Key R&S FSL Menu / Command Command Copy Trace ASCII File Export Decim Sep Trace Math Trace Math Position Average Mode POWER Trace 1 2 3 4 5 6 Selects the active trace (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6). The default setting is trace 1 in the overwrite mode (see Clear Write mode), the other traces are switched off (see Blank mode).
  • Page 230 R&S FSL Setting Traces – TRACE Key Average Selects the Average mode. For details see "Trace mode overview" on page 4.40. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.80. Remote: DISP:TRAC:MODE AVER View Selects the View mode. For details see "Trace mode overview"...
  • Page 231 Setting Traces – TRACE Key R&S FSL Detector Positive Peak Selects the Positive Peak detector. For details see "Detector overview" on page 4.42. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.80. Remote: DET POS Detector Negative Peak Selects the Negative Peak detector. For details see "Detector overview"...
  • Page 232 R&S FSL Setting Traces – TRACE Key Sweep Count Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of sweeps used for averaging. Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed. The default setting is 0. The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram.
  • Page 233 Setting Traces – TRACE Key R&S FSL Decim Sep Selects the decimal separator with floating–point numerals for the ASCII file export to support evaluation programs (e.g. MS Excel) in different languages. The values '.' (decimal point) and ',' (comma) can be set. For details see also ASCII File Export softkey. Remote: FORM:DEXP:DSEP POIN Trace Math Opens the Trace Mathematics dialog box to define which trace is subtracted from trace 1.
  • Page 234 R&S FSL Setting Traces – TRACE Key Logarithmic averaging is preferred to display signals with a low signal to noise ratio. While positive peak values are decreased in logarithmic averaging due to the characteristics involved, it is also true that negative peaks are increased relative to the average value.If the distorted amplitude distribution is averaged, a value is obtained that is smaller than the actual average value.
  • Page 235 Setting Traces – TRACE Key R&S FSL POWER Activates linear power averaging. The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averaging. After the averaging, the data is converted back into its original unit. Unlike the LIN softkey, the averaging is always done in W. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.90.
  • Page 236 R&S FSL Setting Traces – TRACE Key ASCII file export format The data of the file header consist of three columns, each separated by a semicolon: parameter name; numeric value; basic unit. The data section starts with the keyword "Trace <n>" (<n> = number of stored trace), followed by the measured data in one or several columns (depending on measurement) which are also separated by a semicolon.

  • Page 237: Measurement Functions

    Setting Traces – TRACE Key R&S FSL Measurement Functions In this section all menus necessary for setting measurement functions are described. This includes the following topics and keys: • "Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key" on page 4.53 •...

  • Page 238: Using Markers And Delta Markers - Mkr Key

    R&S FSL Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key The markers are used for marking points on traces, reading out measurement results and for quickly selecting a display section. The R&S FSL provides four markers per trace. Marker Active marker Temporary marker...
  • Page 239 Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key R&S FSL Menu and softkey description – "Softkeys of the marker menu" on page 4.57 To display help to a softkey, press the HELP key and then the softkey for which you want to display help.
  • Page 240 R&S FSL Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key To define the basic marker settings 1. Press the MKR key to open the marker menu. Marker 1 is activated and positioned on the maximum value of the trace as normal marker. If several traces are being displayed, the marker is set to the maximum value (peak) of the trace which has the lowest number (1 to 3) and is not frozen (View mode).
  • Page 241 Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key R&S FSL AF demodulation The R&S FSL provides demodulators for AM and FM signals. With these demodulators, a displayed signal can be identified acoustically by using headphones. CAUTION Risk of hearing damage Check the volume setting carefully before putting on the headphones in order to protect your hearing.
  • Page 242 R&S FSL Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key The following settings have to be made to ensure that the power density measurement yields correct values: • Detector: Sample or RMS • Video bandwidth: 0.1 resolution bandwidth with sample detector 3 x resolution bandwidth with RMS detector •...
  • Page 243 Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key R&S FSL Menu / Command Submenu / Command Command Ref Point Time Peak Search Phase Noise 1 2 3 4 Reference Fixed Reference Fixed On/Off Ref Point Level Ref Point Frequency/ Ref Point Time Peak Search Sig Count On/Off More...
  • Page 244 R&S FSL Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key Marker 1/Marker 2/Marker 3/Marker 4/Marker Norm/Delta The Marker <no> softkey activates the corresponding marker and opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the marker to be set to. Pressing the softkey again deactivates the selected marker.
  • Page 245 Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key R&S FSL Ref Point Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter a reference level value. All relative level values of the delta markers refer to this reference level. Remote: CALC:DELT2:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y –10dBm Ref Point Frequency (span >...
  • Page 246 R&S FSL Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key Marker to Trace Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of the trace, on which the marker is to be placed. Remote: CALC:MARK1:TRAC 1 Remote: CALC:DELT:TRAC 1 Marker Demod Opens a submenu to set the demodulation mode and duration.
  • Page 247 Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key R&S FSL n dB down Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value to define the level spacing of the two temporary markers to the right and left of marker 1 (default setting: 3 dB). Activates the temporary markers T1 and T2.
  • Page 248 R&S FSL Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key Marker Peak List Opens the Peak List dialog box and a submenu to define criterias for the sort order and the contents of the peak list. The number of listed peaks is indicated in the title bar. For all listed peaks the frequency and level values are given.
  • Page 249 Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key R&S FSL ASCII File Export Opens the ASCII File Export Name dialog box and saves the content of the marker peak list in ASCII format to the specified file and directory. The file consists of a data section containing the peak list.
  • Page 250 R&S FSL Using Markers and Delta Markers – MKR Key Stepsize Sweep Points Moves the marker or delta marker from one measured value to the next, if the marker or delta marker value is changed via the rotary knob (Marker 1/Marker 2/Marker 3/Marker 4 softkeys). If more measured values than measurement points exist, every single measured value is accessible and its value is displayed in the marker field.

  • Page 251: Changing Settings Via Markers - Mkr-> Key

    Changing Settings via Markers – MKR–> Key R&S FSL Changing Settings via Markers – MKR–> Key The MKR–> key is used for search functions of measurement markers, assignment of the marker frequency as center frequency, restriction of the search area and characterization of maxima and minima.
  • Page 252 R&S FSL Changing Settings via Markers – MKR–> Key To search for a maximum 1. To search the highest maximum, press the Peak softkey. 2. To define the search mode for the next maximum, use the Next Peak Mode < abs > softkey. 3.
  • Page 253 Changing Settings via Markers – MKR–> Key R&S FSL Effect of different peak excursion settings (example) The following figure shows a trace to be examined. Fig. 4-7: Trace example The following table lists the signals as indicated by the marker numbers in the diagram above, as well as the minimum of the amplitude decrease to both sides of the signal: signal # min.
  • Page 254 R&S FSL Changing Settings via Markers – MKR–> Key • 40 dB peak excursion Result: With both methods apart from signal 1 no signal is detected, as the signal level does not decrease by more than 30 dB to either side of any signal. next lower maximum next relative maximum next peak mode abs: signal 1...
  • Page 255 Changing Settings via Markers – MKR–> Key R&S FSL Softkeys of the marker–> menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the marker–> menu. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 256 R&S FSL Changing Settings via Markers – MKR–> Key Peak Sets the active marker/delta marker to the highest maximum of the trace. If the Spectrogram Measurement option (K14) is activated, this softkey provides altered functionality. For details refer to Peak softkey in the marker–> menu of this option. Remote: CALC:MARK:MAX Remote: CALC:DELT:MAX Next Peak...
  • Page 257 Changing Settings via Markers – MKR–> Key R&S FSL Sets the active marker/delta marker to the minimum of the selected trace. If the Spectrogram Measurement option (K14) is activated, this softkey provides altered functionality. For details refer to Min softkey in the marker–> menu of this option. Remote: CALC:MARK:MIN Remote: CALC:DELT:MIN Next Min...
  • Page 258 R&S FSL Changing Settings via Markers – MKR–> Key Right Limit Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the upper limit (left vertical line: S2 for span > 0; T2 for zero span). The search is performed between the lines of the left and right limit (see also Left Limit softkey).
  • Page 259 Changing Settings via Markers – MKR–> Key R&S FSL Auto Max Peak / Auto Min Peak Adds an automatic peak search action for marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep. This function may be used during adjustments of a device under test to keep track of the actual peak marker position and level.

  • Page 260: Power Measurements - Meas Key

    R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key Power Measurements – MEAS Key With its power measurement functions, the R&S FSL is able to measure all the necessary parameters with high accuracy in a wide dynamic range. A modulated carrier is almost always used (except e.g. SSB–AM) for high–frequency transmission of information.
  • Page 261 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL Menu and softkey description – "Softkeys of the power measurement menu" on page 4.88 To display help to a softkey, press the HELP key and then the softkey for which you want to display help.
  • Page 262 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key To measure the power in zero span 1. Press the Time Domain Power softkey to activate the power measurement. The corresponding submenu is displayed. 2. To limit the power evaluation range, switch on the limits (Limits On/Off softkey) and enter the limits by using the Left Limit and Right Limit softkeys.
  • Page 263 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL To measure the carrier–to–noise ratio 1. Press the C/N, C/No softkey to configure the carrier–to–noise ratio measurement. The corresponding submenu is displayed. 2. To activate the measurements without reference to the bandwidth, press the C/N softkey. 3.
  • Page 264 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key Some of the measurement specifications (e.g. PDC, RCR STD–27B) require measurement of the occupied bandwidth using a peak detector. The detector setting of the R&S FSL has to be changed accordingly then. Predefined CP / ACP standards The test parameters for the channel and adjacent–channel measurements are set according to the mobile radio standard.
  • Page 265 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL Settings of CP / ACP test parameters • Frequency span The frequency span must at least cover the channels to be measured plus a measurement margin of approx. 10%. Note: If the frequency span is large in comparison to the channel bandwidth (or the adjacent–channel bandwidths) being examined, only a few points on the trace are available per channel.
  • Page 266 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key The Adjust Settings softkey sets the video bandwidth (VBW) as a function of the channel bandwidth (see formula above) and the smallest possible VBW with regard to the available step size will be selected. •...
  • Page 267 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL Provided XML files for the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement You can change the settings manually or via XML files. The XML files offer a quick way to change the configuration. A set of ready–made XML files for different standards is already provided. For details see Table 4-4.
  • Page 268 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key Path XML file name Displayed standard characteristics* C:\R_S\instr\sem_std\WLAN\802_11j_20MHz ETSI.xml IEEE 802.11j IEEE.xml IEEE 802.11j *Used abbreviations: BC: band class UL: uplink DL: downlink TTA: Telecommunications Technology Association Note: For the WIBRO standards, the 1 MHz channel filter is used for every occurrence of a 1 MHz filter.
  • Page 269 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL – Standard="W–CDMA 3GPP" – LinkDirection="DL" – PowerClass="(39,43)dBm" • The second element is the PowerClass element, which is embedded in the BaseFormat element. It carries settings information about the power classes. Up to four different power classes can be defined.
  • Page 270 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key • The PowerClass element is structered as follows: <PowerClass Index=”n”> <StartPower Unit=”dBm” InclusiveFlag=”true” Value=”StartPowerValue”/> <StopPower Unit=”dBm” InclusiveFlag=”false” Value=”StopPowerValue”/> <DefaultLimitFailMode>Limit Fail Mode</DefaultLimitFailMode> <Range Index=”n”> <!-- For contents of the Range node see Table 4-7 -->...
  • Page 271 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL <ReferenceLevel Unit=”dBm” Value=”Value”/> <RFAttenuation Mode=”Auto” Unit=”dB” Value=”Value”/> <Preamplifier State=”State”/> </Amplitude> </Range> Table 4-5: Attributes and child nodes of the BaseFormat element Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mandatory FileFormatVersion 1.0.0.0 Date “YYYY-MM-DD Date in ISO 8601 format HH:MM:SS”...
  • Page 272 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key Table 4-7: Attributes and child nodes of the Range element (normal ranges) Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mandatory Index 0…19 Indexes are continous and have to start with 0 Name <string> Name of the range Only if ReferenceChannel contains a name and the range is the reference...
  • Page 273 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mandatory node is used RF Atennuation Mode Manual | Auto RF Attenuator Yes, if the ReferenceLevel child node is used Preamplifier ON | OFF Preamp ASCII file export format (Spectrum Emission Mask) The first part of the file lists information about the spectrum analyzer and the general setup.
  • Page 274 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key Menu / Command Submenu / Command Submenu / Command Command Std Dev Limits On/Off Left Limit Right Limit C/N, C/No C/No Channel Bandwidth Adjust Settings CP, ACP, MC–ACP CP / ACP Standard CP / ACP Config # of TX Chan # of Adj Chan Channel Settings...
  • Page 275 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL Menu / Command Submenu / Command Submenu / Command Command x–Axis Range y–Axis Max Value y–Axis Min Value y–Unit %/Abs Default Settings Adjust Settings Adjust Settings CCDF same contents as APD menu Spectrum Emission Mask Sweep List Edit Sweep List/Close Sweep List...
  • Page 276 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key Menu / Command Submenu / Command Submenu / Command Command Margin Show Peaks More List Up List Down Save Evaluation List ASCII File Export Decim Sep Meas Start/Stop More All Functions Off Harmonic Distortion Harmonic On/Off No.
  • Page 277 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL AM Mod Depth Opens a submenu and activates the measurement of the AM modulation depth. An AM– modulated carrier is required on the screen for ensuring correct operation. The level value of marker 1 is taken as the carrier level. When this function is activated, marker 2 and marker 3 are automatically set symmetrically to the carrier on the adjacent peak values of the trace as delta markers and marker 2 is activated for the entry.
  • Page 278 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key Std Dev (zero span) Activates the calculation of the standard deviation of measurement points from the mean value and displays them as measured value. The measurement of the mean power is automatically switched on at the same time. For more details see also "Power measurement in zero span"...
  • Page 279 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL C/No (span > 0) Switches the measurement of the carrier/noise ratio with reference to a 1 Hz bandwidth on or off. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated. The measurement is performed on the trace where marker 1 is located. To shift marker 1 and measure another trace, use the Marker to Trace softkey in the marker menu.
  • Page 280 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key The selection of the standard influences the following parameters: – channel spacing and adjacent–channel spacing – channel bandwidth, adjacent–channel bandwidth, and type of filtering – resolution bandwidth – video bandwidth – detector – # of adjacent channels –...
  • Page 281 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL Channel Bandwidth Opens the TX/ACP Channel Bandwidth dialog box to enter the channel bandwidths for the transmission channels and the adjacent channels. The entry TX is only available for the multi– carrier ACP measurement. The transmission–channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission standard.
  • Page 282 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key If the spacings are not equal, the channel distribution according to the center frequency is as follows: Odd number of TX channels The middle TX channel is centered to center frequency. Even number of TX channels The two TX channels in the middle are used to calculate the frequency between those two channels.
  • Page 283 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL ACP Ref Settings (MC–ACP) Opens an edit dialog box to select the transmission channel to which the adjacent–channel relative power values should be referenced. TX Channel 1 – 12 Selection of one of channels 1 to 12. Min Power TX Channel The transmission channel with the lowest power is used as a reference channel.
  • Page 284 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key Remote: CALC:LIM:ACP ON Remote: CALC:LIM:ACP:<adjacent–channel> 0dB,0dB Remote: CALC:LIM:ACP:<adjacent–channel>:STAT ON Remote: CALC:LIM:ACP:<adjacent–channel>:ABS –10dBm,–10dBm Remote: CALC:LIM:ACP:<adjacent–channel>:ABS:STAT ON For details refer to chapter "Remote Control – Commands", section "CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower Subsystem". Power Mode Opens a submenu to select the power mode. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.30.
  • Page 285 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL Sweep Time Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time. With the RMS detector, a longer sweep time increases the stability of the measurement results. The function of this softkey is identical to the Sweeptime Manual softkey in the bandwidth menu.
  • Page 286 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key Adjust Ref Level Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power. This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R&S FSL or limiting the dynamic range by a too small S/N ratio.
  • Page 287 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL Adjust Ref Level (span > 0) Adjusts the reference level to the measured total power of the signal. The softkey is activated after the first sweep with active measurement of the occupied bandwidth has been completed and the total power of the signal is thus known.
  • Page 288 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key x–Axis Ref Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the currently active unit (dBm, dBMV, etc). The function of this softkey is identical to the Ref Level softkey in the amplitude menu. For the APD function this value is mapped to the right diagram border.
  • Page 289 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL Remote: CALC:STAT:PRES Adjust Settings Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and minimum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution. Adapts the probability scale to the selected number of samples.
  • Page 290 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key Sweep List Opens a submenu to edit the sweep list and displays the Sweep List dialog box. After a preset, the sweep list contains a set of default ranges and parameters. For each range, you can change the parameters listed below.
  • Page 291 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL Range Start/Range Stop (Sweep List dialog box) Sets the start frequency/stop frequency of the selected range. Follow the rules described in "Ranges and range settings" on page 4.81. In order to change the start/stop frequency of the first/last range, select the appropriate span with the SPAN key.
  • Page 292 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key Sweep Time (Sweep List dialog box) Sets the sweep time value for the range. Remote: ESP:RANG1:SWE:TIME 1 (Spectrum Emission Mask) Remote: LIST:RANG1:SWE:TIME 1 (Spurious Emissions) Detector (Sweep List dialog box, Spurious Emissions) Sets the detector for the range. For details refer to "Detector overview"...
  • Page 293 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL Stop after Sweep (Sweep List dialog box, Spurious Emissions) Configures the sweep behavior. The R&S FSL stops after one range is swept and continues only if you confirm (a message box is displayed). The R&S FSL sweeps all ranges in one go.
  • Page 294 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key Abs Limit Start (Sweep List dialog box) Sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the range [dBm]. This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly (see Limit Check 1 to 4 parameter).
  • Page 295 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL Edit Sweep List/Close Sweep List Opens/ closes the Sweep List dialog box. Closing the dialog box updates the measurement results. For further details refer to "Ranges and range settings" on page 4.81. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.80. Insert before Range Inserts a new range to the left of the currently focussed range.
  • Page 296 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key Edit Reference Range Opens the Reference Range dialog box to edit the additional settings used for SEM measurements. – Peak Power Measures the highest peak within the reference range. – Channel Power Measures the channel power within the reference range (integral bandwidth method). If the Channel Power reference power type is activated, the dialog box is extended to define additional settings: –...
  • Page 297 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL List Evaluation On/Off Activates or deactivates the list evaluation. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.80. Remote: CALC:ESP:PSE:AUTO OFF (Spectrum Emission Mask) Remote: CALC:PSE:AUTO OFF (Spurious Emissions) Remote: TRAC? LIST List Full Screen Switches between split screen and full screen.
  • Page 298 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key ASCII File Export An example of an output file is given in "ASCII file export format (Spectrum Emission Mask)" page 4.88. For further details refer also to the ASCII File Export softkey in the trace menu of the base unit.
  • Page 299 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL – Sweep List Opens the sweep list dialog box. For details see the Sweep List dialog box. – Add / Remove Activates or deactivates power classes to be defined. Up to four power classes can be defined. The number of active power classes affect the availability of the items of the Used Power Classes dropdown menu.
  • Page 300 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key Meas Start/Stop Aborts/restarts the current measurement and displays the status: Start The measurement is currently running. Stop The measurement has been stopped, or, in single sweep mode, the end of the sweep has been reached. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.80.
  • Page 301 Power Measurements – MEAS Key R&S FSL Details On/Off Configures the list contents. Displays the whole list contents. Displays only the highest peaks (one peak per range). This softkey is available from firmware version 1.80. Peaks per Range Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of peaks per range that are stored in the list. Once the selected number of peaks has been reached, the peak search is stopped in the current range and continued in the next range.
  • Page 302 R&S FSL Power Measurements – MEAS Key Harmonic Sweep Time For details refer to the Sweeptime Manual softkey in the bandwidth menu. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.10. Harmonic RBW Auto Enables/disables the automatic adjustment of the resolution bandwidth. The automatic adjustment is carried out according to: RBWn = RBW If RBW...

  • Page 303: Using Limit Lines And Display Lines - Lines Key

    Using Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key R&S FSL Using Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key The LINES key is used to configure limit and display lines. To open the lines menu Press the LINES key. The lines menu and the Select Limit Line dialog box are displayed.
  • Page 304 R&S FSL Using Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key To work with display lines Initial situation: The line is switched on (softkey with highlighted background) or off (softkey without highlighted background), for example the Display Line 1. 1. Press the Display Lines softkey. 2.
  • Page 305 Using Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key R&S FSL 2. To display only the limit lines that are compatible, activate the Show compatible option. For details on compatibility refer to "Limit Lines" on page 4.123. 3. To navigate into a subdirectory, use the Show Directory and Hide Directory buttons. To create a new limit line 1.
  • Page 306 R&S FSL Using Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key RBW 300 Hz Marker [T1] 3 kHz -28.4 dBm Ref -20 dBm SWT 100 ms Att 10 dB 200.0100 MHz resulting limit absolute threshold relative limit line Center 200 MHz 10 kHz/ Span 100 kHz 10.
  • Page 307 Using Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key R&S FSL 4. To shift the complete limit line parallel in the horizontal direction, select the Shift x button and enter an x shift value. In this manner, a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally.
  • Page 308 R&S FSL Using Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key Limit Lines Limit lines are used to define amplitude curves or spectral distribution boundaries on the display screen which are not to be exceeded. They indicate, for example, the upper limits for interference radiation or spurious waves which are allowed from a device under test (DUT).
  • Page 309 Using Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key R&S FSL Display Lines Display Line 1 Display Line 2 Frequency Line 1 Frequency Line 2 Time Line 1 Time Line 2 Select Traces to check Opens the Select Traces to Check dialog box to activate the selected limit line for a trace. One limit line can be activated for several traces simultaneously.
  • Page 310 R&S FSL Using Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key Edit Margin Sets the focus on the Margin field to enter or change a margin for the limit line. The default setting is 0 dB (i.e. no margin). This softkey is available from firmware version 1.10. Value Opens an edit dialog box to change an existing x or y value, depending on the selected column.
  • Page 311 Using Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key R&S FSL Edit Opens a submenu to edit limit lines. For details see also "Limit Lines" on page 4.123 and "To edit an existing limit line" on page 4.121. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.10. Remote: For details refer to chapter "Remote Control –...
  • Page 312 R&S FSL Using Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key Time Line 1 and Time Line 2 (zero span) Enable or disable the time lines 1/2 and open an edit dialog box to enter the position of the lines. For details see also "Display Lines"...

  • Page 313: Measurement Modes

    Using Limit Lines and Display Lines – LINES Key R&S FSL Measurement Modes This section describes the provided measurement modes, the change of measurement modes and the access to the menus of all active measurement modes. For details refer to the following sections: •...

  • Page 314: Measurement Mode Selection - Mode Key

    R&S FSL Measurement Mode Selection – MODE Key Measurement Mode Selection – MODE Key The MODE key provides a quick access to the menu of the current measurement mode and a fast change of the measurement mode. You can choose from the following measurement modes: •...
  • Page 315 Measurement Mode Selection – MODE Key R&S FSL Cable TV Analyzer mode (Cable TV Measurements option, K20) The Cable TV Analyzer mode requires an instrument equipped with the corresponding optional software. This mode provides ready–made measurements for analog and digital TV signals where most of the parameters are set automatically.

  • Page 316: Measurement Mode Menus - Menu Key

    R&S FSL Measurement Mode Menus – MENU Key Measurement Mode Menus – MENU Key The MENU key provides a quick access to the menu of the current measurement mode. For details on measurement modes refer to "Measurement Mode Selection – MODE Key" on page 4.129.
  • Page 317 Measurement Mode Menus – MENU Key R&S FSL Spectrogram (Spectrogram Measurement option, K14) Displays the menu of the Spectrogram Measurement option. For details refer to "Spectrogram Measurement (Option K14)" on page 4.191. Marker Demod Volume (Spectrum Analyzer mode) Opens a dialog box to regulate the volume for acoustic monitoring. 1300.2519.12 4.132 E-11...

  • Page 318: Models And Options

    R&S FSL Measurement Mode Menus – MENU Key Models and Options This section describes models and firmware options that are not included in the basic unit configuration. If hardware options are controlled via the firmware, the provided softkeys are described in the corresponding menu section.

  • Page 319: Tracking Generator (Models 13, 16 And 28)

    Tracking Generator (Models 13, 16 and 28) R&S FSL Tracking Generator (Models 13, 16 and 28) During operation the tracking generator emits a signal exactly at the input frequency of the R&S FSL. The tracking generator can be used in all measurement modes. Acquisition of test setup calibration values (see Source Cal softkey) and normalization using these correction values (see Normalize softkey) is only possible in the tracking generator measurement mode.
  • Page 320 R&S FSL Tracking Generator (Models 13, 16 and 28) To calibrate for transmission and reflection measurement Prerequisite: The instrument is in tracking generator measurement mode (for details refer to "Measurement Mode Selection – MODE Key" on page 4.129). 1. Press the Source Power softkey to enter the generator output level. If the tracking generator is off, it is switched on.
  • Page 321 Tracking Generator (Models 13, 16 and 28) R&S FSL Calibration mechanism Calibration means a calculation of the difference between the currently measured power and a reference curve, independent of the selected type of measurement (transmission/reflection). The hardware settings used for measuring the reference curve are included in the reference dataset. Even with normalization switched on, the device settings can be changed in a wide area without stopping the normalization.
  • Page 322 R&S FSL Tracking Generator (Models 13, 16 and 28) Softkeys of the tracking generator menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the tracking generator menu. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 323 Tracking Generator (Models 13, 16 and 28) R&S FSL Power Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter a constant level offset for the tracking generator. Values from –200 dB to +200 dB in 1 dB steps are allowed. The default setting is 0 dB. Offsets are indicated by the enhancement label LVL.
  • Page 324 R&S FSL Tracking Generator (Models 13, 16 and 28) Ref Value Position Switches the reference line on or off. The reference line marks the reference position at which the normalization result (calculated difference with a reference trace) is displayed. For details on the reference line see "Calibration mechanism"...

  • Page 325: Analog Demodulation (Option K7)

    Analog Demodulation (Option K7) R&S FSL Analog Demodulation (Option K7) The digital signal processing in the R&S FSL, used in the analyzer mode for digital IF filters, is also ideally suited for demodulating AM, FM, or PM signals. The firmware option R&S FSL–K7 provides the necessary measurement functions.
  • Page 326 R&S FSL Analog Demodulation (Option K7) Circuit description – block diagrams The software demodulator runs on the main processor of the analyzer. The demodulation process is shown in Fig. 4-10: Block diagram of software demodulator. All calculations are performed simultaneously with the same I/Q data set. Magnitude (= amplitude) and phase of the complex I/Q pairs are determined.
  • Page 327 Analog Demodulation (Option K7) R&S FSL In addition, important parameters are calculated: • A counter determines the modulation frequency for AM, FM, and PM. • average power = carrier power (RF power) • average frequency = carrier frequency offset (FM) •...
  • Page 328 R&S FSL Analog Demodulation (Option K7) Sample rate, measurement time and trigger offset Depending on the sample rate, the maximum demodulation bandwidths listed in the table can be obtained during the measurement. The permissible value range of the measurement time and trigger offset depends on the selected demodulation bandwidth.
  • Page 329 Analog Demodulation (Option K7) R&S FSL Softkeys of the analog demodulation menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the analog demodulation menu. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 330 R&S FSL Analog Demodulation (Option K7) Result Display Opens a submenu to select the measurement result to be displayed. The RF or AF signal in the zero span or the RF or AF frequency spectrum determined via FFT can be selected for display. In order to display the measurement results, the screen is divided in two halves.
  • Page 331 Analog Demodulation (Option K7) R&S FSL Demod BW Opens an edit dialog box to enter the demodulation bandwidth of the analog demodulation. The demodulation bandwidth determines the sampling rate for recording the signal to be analyzed. For details on the relation between demodulation bandwidth and sampling rate refer to "Sample rate, measurement time and trigger offset"...
  • Page 332 R&S FSL Analog Demodulation (Option K7) Reference Position Determines the position of the reference line for the modulation depth or the phase or frequency deviation on the y–axis of the diagram. By default, this line is set to 0. The position is entered as a percentage of the diagram height with 100 % corresponding to the upper diagram border.
  • Page 333 Analog Demodulation (Option K7) R&S FSL If DC is selected, the phase runs according to the existing frequency offset. In addition, the DC signal contains a phase offset of ± . If AC is selected, the frequency offset and phase offset are automatically corrected, i.e. the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line.
  • Page 334 R&S FSL Analog Demodulation (Option K7) Deemphasis Opens the Deemphasis dialog box to switch on a deemphasis with the given time constant. The deemphasis is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range: 25 Ms: 25 kHz demodulation bandwidth 18 MHz 50 Ms: 6.4 kHz demodulation bandwidth...
  • Page 335 Analog Demodulation (Option K7) R&S FSL Zoom Activates or deactivates the zoom function. The zoom function is not available if the number of measurement points falls below 501. activated: A 1–to–1 allocation is selected, i.e. each measurement point corresponds to a measured value.
  • Page 336 R&S FSL Analog Demodulation (Option K7) 0.1*Demod BW (AF/RF Time Domain, AF Spectrum) For details see 0.1*RBW softkey in the frequency menu of the base unit. 0.5*Span (RF Spectrum) For details refer to the 0.5*Span softkey in the frequency menu of the base unit. 0.5*Demod BW (AF/RF Time Domain, AF Spectrum) For details see 0.5*RBW softkey in the frequency menu of the base unit.
  • Page 337 Analog Demodulation (Option K7) R&S FSL Softkeys of the span menu (Analog Demodulation mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the span menu in Analog Demodulation mode (SPAN key). It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 338 R&S FSL Analog Demodulation (Option K7) Softkeys of the amplitude menu (Analog Demodulation mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the amplitude menu in Analog Demodulation mode (AMPT key). It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 339 Analog Demodulation (Option K7) R&S FSL Dev per Division For details refer to the Dev per Division softkey in the analog demodulation menu. dB per Division For details refer to the dB per Division softkey in the analog demodulation menu. Reference Position For details refer to the Reference Position softkey in the analog demodulation menu.
  • Page 340 R&S FSL Analog Demodulation (Option K7) Unit (PM AF result display) For details refer to the Unit softkey in the amplitude menu of the base unit. Input 50 D / 75 D For details refer to the Input 50 D / 75 D softkey in the amplitude menu of the base unit. Softkeys of the bandwidth menu (Analog Demodulation mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the bandwidth menu in Analog Demodulation mode (BW key).
  • Page 341 Analog Demodulation (Option K7) R&S FSL Continuous Sweep For details refer to the Continuous Sweep softkey in the in the sweep menu of the base unit. Single Sweep For details refer to the Single Sweep softkey in the in the sweep menu of the base unit. Continue Sgl Sweep For details refer to the Continue Single Sweep softkey in the in the sweep menu of the base unit.
  • Page 342 R&S FSL Analog Demodulation (Option K7) In Analog Demodulation mode, the next measurement is triggered if the selected input signal exceeds the threshold specified using the Trg / Gate Level softkey. A periodic signal modulated onto the carrier frequency can be displayed in this way. It is recommended that the measurement time covers at least five periods of the audio signal.

  • Page 343: Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8)

    Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) This option provides measurements to test the conformity of signal sources to the Bluetooth RF Test Specification (Bluetooth SIG). For background information on Bluetooth measurements refer to chapter "Advanced Measurement Examples". This option is available from firmware version 1.30.
  • Page 344 R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Measurements overview The Bluetooth Measurements option provides the following measurement types: – "Output Power" on page 4.161 – "Adjacent Channel Power" on page 4.162 – "Modulation Characteristics" on page 4.162 – "Initial Carrier Frequency Tolerance" on page 4.163 –...
  • Page 345 Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL 4. Select the packet length. – Press Packet Type softkey. The list of available packet type is displayed. – Select the desired packet length and confirm the selection with ENTER. 5. Select the power class of the DUT. –...
  • Page 346 R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Labels used in the measurement displays • Enhancement label TDF Offset values, set with the Antenna Gain softkey that are larger or smaller than 0 dB will activate the enhancement label TDF at the right diagram border. Measurements In this section, every measurement type is introduced by a short description.
  • Page 347 Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Adjacent Channel Power measurement The measurement of the TX Output Spectrum – Adjacent Channel Power measurement (TX Spec ACP softkey) measures the power of all adjacent channels. Fig. 4-13 TX Spectrum ACP measurement The following limits are given by the RF Test Specification: •...
  • Page 348 R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Fig. 4-14 Modulation Characteristics measurement Initial Carrier Frequency Tolerance measurement The measurement of the Initial Carrier Frequency Tolerance (Init Carr Freq Tol softkey) determines the carrier offset of the four preamble bits. According to the RF Test Specification the calculation of the carrier offset is performed from the middle of the first preamble bit to the middle of the bit following the preamble.
  • Page 349 Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Carrier Frequency Drift measurement The measurement of the Carrier Frequency Drift (Carr Freq Drift softkey) determines the maximum frequency drift between the average value of the preamble bits and any 10 bit group of the payload. Additionally the maximum drift rate between all 10 bit groups in the payload is determined every 50µs.
  • Page 350 R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Fig. 4-17 Relative Transmit Power (EDR) measurement In–band Spurious Emissions (EDR) measurement The measurement of the In–band Spurious Emissions (Spurious Emissions softkey) is an enhanced data rate measurement (EDR). It verifies whether the level of unwanted signals within the used frequency band lies below the required level.
  • Page 351 Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Carrier Frequency Stability and Modulation Accuracy (EDR) measurement The measurement of the Carrier Frequency Stability and Modulation Accuracy (Carr Freq Stability softkey) is an enhanced data rate measurement (EDR). It verifies that the modulation accuracy and the frequency stability are working within the required limits.
  • Page 352 R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Softkeys of the Bluetooth menu This menu provides the softkeys for the basic settings, which are common to all tests. The following table shows all softkeys available in the Bluetooth menu. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys.
  • Page 353 Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Packet Bytes SCO Opens an edit dialog box to set the number of payload bytes that are transmitted in a packet. For SCO packets, the payload length must be adjusted because those packets have no payload header.
  • Page 354 R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Opens an edit dialog box to enter the lower 24 bit (Lower Address Part, LAP)of the Bluetooth Device Address (BD_ADDR) of the equipment under test (EUT). The LAP is used to calculate the 64–bit sync word. The sync word in return is used to determine the start of a packet by correlation and to determine the position of the first preamble bit p0 using the method described in the RF Test Specification.
  • Page 355 Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Burst Offset Opens an edit dialog box to define the time to be displayed before the identified burst. The values range from –10 ms to + 10 ms, with negative values moving the burst to the left, positive values to the right.
  • Page 356 R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Search Len Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the search length used for determining the sync word or the burst. The unit of the search length is seconds; the values range from 100 µs to (400001 / points per symbol) µs.
  • Page 357 Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Softkeys of the frequency menu (Bluetooth mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the frequency menu in Bluetooth mode (FREQ key). It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 358 R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Softkeys of the amplitude menu (Bluetooth mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the amplitude menu in Bluetooth mode (AMPT key). It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 359 Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Reference Value (Modulation Char, Init Carr Freq Tol, Carr Freq Drift) Opens an edit dialog box to enter the FM deviation at the reference line on the y–axis. This allows individual frequency offsets to be taken into account for the display of the measurement curves.
  • Page 360 R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Softkeys of the bandwidth menu (Bluetooth mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the bandwidth menu in Bluetooth mode (BW key). It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 361 Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Res BW Manual (Output Power, Rel TX Power) Opens an edit dialog box to enter the resolution bandwidth. The values range from 1 MHz to 3 MHz. The default value is 3 MHz. Remote: CONF:BTO:BAND 1KHZ Res BW Auto (Output Power, TX Spec ACP, Rel TX Power, Spurious Emissions) Sets the bandwidth according to the values defined in the RF Test Specification.
  • Page 362 R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Softkeys of the sweep menu (Bluetooth mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the sweep menu in Bluetooth mode (SWEEP key). In the Bluetooth mode, the sweep menu is used for direct entry into the measurement menu of the currently selected measurement.
  • Page 363 Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Continue Test (Modulation Char) Measures the frequency deviation of further packets after the bit pattern has been changed at the EUT, just like the Start Test softkey did for the first bit pattern type. The results of the preceding measurement are preserved and are taken into account for the new measurements.
  • Page 364 R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Power Avg Stop (Output Power) Opens an edit dialog box to enter the stop position of the evaluation area for the average burst power. The values range from 0 to 100%, the default setting is 80%. For further information refer to "Position of a Bluetooth burst"...
  • Page 365 Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Gate Length (Spurious Emissions) Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time in seconds. Usually, this is the length of the DPSK section. Remote: SWE:EGAT:LENG 10ms GFSK Start (Rel TX Power) Opens an edit dialog box to enter the start time for the power measurement of the GFSK sections of the packet.
  • Page 366 R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Trigger Source Opens the Trigger dialog box to select one of the following trigger sources: Free Run, External, IF Power. For further details refer to the Trg / Gate Source softkey in the trigger menu of the base unit. Trg/Gate Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the trigger / gate level.
  • Page 367 Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Menu / Command Submenu / Command Command Channel List Start Modulation Char Start Test Continue Test Continuous Sweep Meas Time Manual Meas Time Auto Sweep Count Zoom Init Carr Freq Tol Continuous Sweep Single Sweep Meas Time Manual Meas Time Auto Sweep Count...
  • Page 368 R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Menu / Command Submenu / Command Command Meas Time Auto Block Count Diff Phase Continuous Sweep Single Sweep Meas Time Manual Meas Time Auto Sweep Count Output Power Opens a submenu to configure the Output Power measurement. For further details refer to "Output Power measurement"...
  • Page 369 Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) R&S FSL Carr Freq Drift Opens a submenu to configure the Carr Freq Drift measurement. For further details refer to "Carrier Frequency Drift measurement" on page 4.164. Remote: CONF:BTO:MEAS CFDR Remote: CALC:BTO:CFDR? Remote: CALC:BTO:CFDR:RATE? Opens a submenu with all available enhanced data rate measurements. Rel TX Power Opens a submenu to configure the Rel TX Power measurement.
  • Page 370 R&S FSL Bluetooth Measurements (Option K8) Diff Phase Opens a submenu to configure the Diff Phase measurement. For further details refer to "Differential Phase Encoding (EDR) measurement" on page 4.166. Remote: CONF:BTO:MEAS DPEN Remote: CALC:BTO:DPEN:NERR? Remote: CALC:BTO:DPEN? Remote: CALC:BTO:DPEN:BER? 1300.2519.12 4.185 E-11...

  • Page 371: Power Meter (Option K9)

    Power Meter (Option K9) R&S FSL Power Meter (Option K9) For precise power measurement a power sensor is connected to the instrument via the front panel (USB connector) or the rear panel (power sensor, option R&S FSL–B5). The Power Sensor Support firmware option provides the power measurement functions for this test setup (see Fig.
  • Page 372 R&S FSL Power Meter (Option K9) To zero the power meter 1. Press the Zero softkey. A dialog box is displayed that prompts you to disconnect all signals from the input of the power sensor. 2. Disconnect all signals from the input of the power sensor and press ENTER to continue. 3.
  • Page 373 Power Meter (Option K9) R&S FSL Power Meter On/Off Switches the power measurement on or off. Remote: PMET ON Frequency Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the frequency of the signal to be measured. The power sensor has a memory with frequency–dependent correction factors. This allows extreme accuracy for signals of a known frequency.
  • Page 374 R&S FSL Power Meter (Option K9) Remote: PMET:MTIM SHOR Remote: PMET:MTIM:AVER ON Meas–>Ref Sets the currently measured power as a reference value for the relative display. The reference value can also be set manually via the Reference Value softkey. Remote: CALC:PMET:REL:AUTO ONCE Reference Value Opens an edit dialog box to enter a reference value for relative measurements in the unit dBm.
  • Page 375 Power Meter (Option K9) R&S FSL This softkey is only available in conjunction with a NRP-Z81 power sensor. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.90. Remote: SENS:PMET:TRIG ON Trigger Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the trigger level. This softkey is only available in conjunction with a NRP-Z81 power sensor.

  • Page 376: Spectrogram Measurement (Option K14)

    R&S FSL Spectrogram Measurement (Option K14) Spectrogram Measurement (Option K14) The Spectrogram Measurement option provides a graphical view of frequency and amplitude changes over a time interval. For display details refer to "Spectrogram view" on page 4.192. Not all measurement types can be displayed in the Spectrogram view. If the Spectrogram Measurement option is active and a measurement cannot be displayed in form of a spectrogram, the softkey of the corresponding measurement is disabled.
  • Page 377 Spectrogram Measurement (Option K14) R&S FSL Spectrogram view The Spectrogram view is divided into two panes: the spectrum analyzer result display (upper pane) and the spectrogram result display (lower pane). • spectrum analyzer result display As in Spectrum Analyzer mode, all traces are displayed and available. For trace 1, the View and Blank trace modes are not available.
  • Page 378 R&S FSL Spectrogram Measurement (Option K14) A color map below the spectrogram shows the level and color assignment: the minimum level on the left (–101.0 dBm in the example), the maximum level on the right (–1.0 dBm in the example). The used colors are defined via the Color softkey.
  • Page 379 Spectrogram Measurement (Option K14) R&S FSL Softkeys of the spectrogram menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the spectrogram menu (MENU key). It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 380 R&S FSL Spectrogram Measurement (Option K14) Time Stamp On/Off Defines the displayed item in the right lower corner. The time stamp (system time of the sweep start) is displayed instead of the frame number. The frame number is displayed. Remote: CALC:SPEC:TST ON Softkeys of the sweep menu (Spectrogram view) The following table shows all softkeys available in the sweep menu of the Spectrogram Measurement option (SWEEP key).
  • Page 381 Spectrogram Measurement (Option K14) R&S FSL Select Frame Opens an edit dialog box to select the frame if no measurement is running. If the active marker value is altered, the value of the selected frame is updated accordingly. During a measurement, the value is fixed to 0 and this softkey is not available. Remote: CALC:SPEC:FRAM:SEL –10 Sweeptime Manual For details refer to the Sweeptime Manual softkey in the sweep menu of the base unit.
  • Page 382 R&S FSL Spectrogram Measurement (Option K14) Spectrogram Clear Deletes the spectrogram result display and the history buffer. Remote: CALC:SPEC:CLE Softkeys of the marker menu (Spectrogram view) Additional to the functionality of the base unit (for details refer to "Softkeys of the marker menu" on page 4.57), the edit dialog box for markers and delta markers is extended.
  • Page 383 Spectrogram Measurement (Option K14) R&S FSL Select 1 2 3 4 The edit dialog box for markers and delta markers is extended as described in "Markers and marker values" on page 4.193. For further details refer to the Select 1 2 3 4 softkey in the marker–>...
  • Page 384 R&S FSL Spectrogram Measurement (Option K14) Remote: CALC:MARK2:MAX:LEFT (<) Remote: CALC:DELT:MAX:LEFT (<) Remote: CALC:MARK:MAX:RIGH (>) Remote: CALC:DELT:MAX:RIGH (>) Remote: CALC:MARK2:MAX:NEXT (abs) Remote: CALC:DELT2:MAX:NEXT (abs) Next Peak Y Search up/abs/dn Selects the mode of the Next Peak softkey, if the Y Search is selected (Marker Search Type softkey).
  • Page 385 Spectrogram Measurement (Option K14) R&S FSL Next Min Y Search up/abs/dn Selects the mode of the Next Min softkey, if the Y Search is selected (Marker Search Type softkey). Three settings are available: Sets the active marker/delta marker to the next minimum above the current marker position (constant x–axis value).
  • Page 386 R&S FSL Spectrogram Measurement (Option K14) Sets the active marker/delta marker to the highest minimum according to the selected search type (Marker Search Type softkey). For further details refer to the Min softkey in the marker–> menu of the base unit. Remote: CALC:MARK:MIN (in x direction) Remote: CALC:DELT:MIN (in x direction) Remote: CALC:MARK:SPEC:Y:MIN (y direction)
  • Page 387 Spectrogram Measurement (Option K14) R&S FSL Exclude LO For details refer to the Exclude LO softkey in the marker–> menu of the base unit. 1300.2519.12 4.202 E-11...

  • Page 388: Cable Tv Measurements (Option K20)

    R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) The Cable TV Measurements option provides ready–made measurements for analog and digital TV signals where most of the parameters are set automatically. Thus the measurements can be carried out fast and with a minimum of effort.
  • Page 389 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Tasks – "To edit a channel table" on page 4.205 – "To create a channel table" on page 4.206 – "To copy a channel table" on page 4.206 – "To create a new modulation standard" on page 4.207 –...
  • Page 390 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) • digital TV measurements: – "Spectrum" on page 4.218 – "Overview" on page 4.219 – "Constellation Diagram (Modulation Analysis)" on page 4.219 – "Modulation Errors (Modulation Analysis)" on page 4.220 – "Echo Pattern (Channel Analysis)" on page 4.220 –...
  • Page 391 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL 4. In the Name and Description field, edit the name and the description for the channel table via the keypad. If the name of a channel table is changed, the channel table with the old name is not overwritten but retained, and a new channel table is created additionally.
  • Page 392 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) To create a new modulation standard 1. In the Channel Setup submenu, press the Edit, New, or Copy softkey. 2. In the Modulation Options submenu, press the New softkey. The Modulation Standard Options dialog box is displayed. As soon as you change entries, in the title bar, *(unsaved changes) is displayed.
  • Page 393 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL 8. Press the Save Changes softkey to save the changes. The new modulation standard can be used for any channel. 9. To discard the changes, press the Discard Changes softkey. To edit a modulation standard 1.
  • Page 394 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) To perform a measurement without a channel table 1. Press the Channel Setup softkey. The Channel Tables dialog box is displayed. 2. Select no channel table < none > and press the ENTER key or the Activate softkey. 3.
  • Page 395 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Channel tables Channel tables are lists of channels, as they occur in a cable TV network. They provide a quick access to the channels to be analyzed. Depending on its designation, a channel table can contain all channels of a cable TV network or it can be restricted to a subset of all available channels, e.g.
  • Page 396 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Signal level The signal level represents the expected RMS (digital TV) or peak (analog TV) channel power. This power is only valid for one single channel, which is the current measurement channel. The signal level is not identical to the level of the signal fed into the R&S FSL's RF input.
  • Page 397 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Attenuator setting Preamplifier setting 30 dB 25 dB 20 dB 15 dB 10 dB 5 dB 0 dB 15 dB 10 dB 5 dB 0 dB To adjust the attenuation manually, refer to the table above that lists reasonable combinations of attenuator and preamplifier settings.
  • Page 398 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Short list of cable TV terms and abbreviations Term or abbreviation Description Analog modulation technique where the carrier amplitude contains the Amplitude Modulation information. bar line see VITS DVB–C DVB–C uses single carrier QAM as modulation technique. Digital Video Broadcasting for Cable Systems DVB–T DVB–T uses OFDM as modulation technique.
  • Page 399 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Carriers – analog TV This measurement determines the carrier powers (vision carrier, one or two sound carriers) and their frequencies in analog TV channels and compares them against limits. The sound carrier power frequencies are displayed relative to the measured vision carrier power frequency.
  • Page 400 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) 5. To configure the measurement, press the C/N Setup softkey. The C/N Setup dialog box is displayed. – Under Measurement Method, activate one of the options. For details refer to the C/N Setup softkey in the measurement menu.
  • Page 401 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL 5. To configure the measurement, press the CSO Setup softkey. The CSO Setup dialog box is displayed. – Under Measurement Method, activate one of the options. For details refer to the CSO Setup softkey in the measurement menu.
  • Page 402 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) 6. To change the limits, press the Edit Table softkey. 7. To adjust the input attenuator, press the Adjust Attenuation softkey. 8. Press the RUN key. 9. To measure in the next frequency span defined via the C/N setup, press the Next Meas Frequency softkey.
  • Page 403 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL 2. Press the Analog TV softkey. 3. Press the Vision Modulation softkey. 4. To change the limits, press the Edit Table softkey. 5. To adjust the input attenuator, press the Adjust Attenuation softkey. 6.
  • Page 404 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Overview – digital TV This measurement determines the modulation accuracy of digitally modulated single carrier cable TV signals. The measurement results are displayed in a table: MER (rms) for the root mean square of the modulation error rate, MER (peak) for the peak of the modulation error rate, EVM (rms) for the root mean square of the error vector magnitude, EVM (peak) for the peak of the error vector magnitude, Carrier Frequency Offset, and Symbol Rate Offset.
  • Page 405 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Modulation Errors (Modulation Analysis) – digital TV This measurement determines the modulation accuracy. The measurement results are displayed in a table: Amplitude Imbalance (amplification difference of I and Q signal caused by a non–ideal IQ modulator in the transmitter), Quadrature Error (phase offset relative to the ideal phase difference between the I and Q signal), Carrier Suppression, and Phase Jitter (root mean square of phase error).
  • Page 406 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) 8. Press the RUN key. For a more detailed description of this measurement type refer to chapter "Advanced Measurement Examples". Channel Power – digital TV This measurement determines the channel power of a digital TV channel. The following parameters can be set: Parameter channel number...
  • Page 407 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL CCDF – digital TV This measurement determines the complementary cumulative distribution function (CCDF) of the complex base band signal. The following parameters can be set: Parameter channel number power exceeding probability x– and y–axis scaling The basic procedure is the following: 1.
  • Page 408 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) 7. Press the RUN key. For a more detailed description of this measurement type refer to chapter "Advanced Measurement Examples". Softkeys of the Cable TV Analyzer menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Cable TV Analyzer menu. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys.
  • Page 409 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Creates a new channel table and opens the Channel Table dialog box with the according submenu to edit the channel table. It is recommended to use long names in order to distinguish the channel tables from each other easily.
  • Page 410 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Edit Opens the Modulation Standard Options dialog box for the modulation standard in focus. Alternatively to this softkey, the rotary knob or the ENTER key can be pressed. For details refer to "Modulation standards" on page 4.210 and "To create a new modulation standard"...
  • Page 411 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Adjust Attenuation Adjusts the input attenuator. For details on the adjustment procedure refer to "Attenuation adjustment" on page 4.211. Remote: POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV Softkeys of the frequency menu (Cable TV Analyzer mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the frequency menu in Cable TV Analyzer mode (FREQ key).
  • Page 412 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Channel Displays the active channel table to select a particular measurement channel. The active channel is highlighted. All channels can be selected, except those with modulation standard < unused >. Incompatible channels are marked accordingly; for example an analog TV channel inside a digital TV measurement.
  • Page 413 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Softkeys of the amplitude menu (Cable TV Analyzer mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the amplitude menu in Cable TV Analyzer mode (AMPT key). It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 414 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) RF Atten Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation. For details see also "Attenuation adjustment" on page 4.211. Signal Lvl Offset For details refer to the Ref Level Offset softkey in the amplitude menu of the base unit. Grid Abs/Rel For details refer to the Grid Abs / Rel softkey in the amplitude menu of the base unit.
  • Page 415 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Softkeys of the measurement menu (Cable TV Analyzer mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the measurement menu in Cable TV Analyzer mode (MEAS key). It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 416 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Menu / Submenu / Submenu / Command Command Command Command More Video Scope Channel No Line Field 1/2 Sweeptime Manual Trigger Offset Adjust Attenuation Vision Modulation Channel No Edit Table Adjust Attenuation Channel No Auto Range Edit Table Adjust Attenuation...
  • Page 417 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Menu / Submenu / Submenu / Command Command Command Command More Channel Power Channel No Edit Table Adjust Attenuation Channel No Scaling x–Axis Signal Lvl x–Axis Range y–Axis Max Value y–Axis Min Value Default Settings Adjust Attenuation CCDF...
  • Page 418 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Channel No Opens an edit dialog box to select the measurement channel. Select the previous or next channel via the rotary knob or the arrow keys, or enter the channel number. Only compatible channels can be selected, entries of incompatible channel are skipped. Incompatible channels are channels of a different signal type or channels with the modulation standard <...
  • Page 419 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Remote: CALCulate:ATV:LIMit Subsystem, CALCulate:ATV:LIMit:RESult Subsystem, CALCulate:ATV:RESult Subsystem for analog TV Remote: CALCulate:DTV:LIMit Subsystem, CALCulate:DTV:LIMit:RESult Subsystem, CALCulate:DTV:RESult Subsystem for digital TV Meas Carrier Switches the carrier or noise measurement on or off. activate Starts a new carrier measurement with the next sweep. deactiv Starts a new noise measurement with the next sweep.
  • Page 420 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Same as Meas Channel Sets the active measurement channel as reference channel. If the active measurement channel is changed, e.g. via the Channel No softkey, the reference channel is also changed automatically. This is the default setting. Remote: ATV:CN:POW:REF:MODE MCH Remote: ATV:CSO:POW:REF:MODE MCH Remote: ATV:CTB:POW:REF:MODE MCH...
  • Page 421 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Remote: ATV:CN:MEAS:MODE OSER (Measurement Method) Remote: ATV:CN:TABL1:MFR 1,1000,1000 (Measurement Frequencies) Remote: ATV:CN:BWID 7MHZ (Noise Reference Bandwidth) Remote: ATV:CN:POW:NCOR ON (Noise Floor Correction) Insert Line Inserts a line in the Measurement Frequencies table to add a parameter set. This softkey is only active, if the focus is on the Measurement Frequencies table.
  • Page 422 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Opens a submenu to measure the carrier–to–second order beat ratio (CSO). For further information refer to "CSO – analog TV" on page 4.215. Remote: CONF:ATV:MEAS CSO Remote: CALC:ATV:RES:CSO? ALL CSO Setup Opens the CSO Setup dialog box to configure the following: –...
  • Page 423 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Opens a submenu to measure the carrier–to–composite triple beat ratio (CTB). The measurement always takes place off–service with current measurement channel has to be switched off. An according message prompts you to do so. In this channel, a noise marker is placed, and the noise power is determined.
  • Page 424 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Analog TV Settings Opens the Analog TV Settings dialog box to modify the modulation standard parameters. The displayed parameters are derived from the modulation standard referenced in the active channel table. If no channel table < none > is activated, the default modulation standard is used (for details see also "Modulation standards"...
  • Page 425 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Line Opens an edit dialog box to set the line number of the TV picture. The numbering conventions depend on the following conditions: TV standard Color system Field number Line numbering – – 1, 2, …, 625 –...
  • Page 426 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Auto Range Automatically adjusts the x– and y–axis once. Alternatively the range of the y–axis can be changed via the Range Log softkey or the Range Linear softkey in the amplitude menu. Remote: DISP:TRAC:Y:AUTO ON Digital TV Opens a submenu with all available digital TV measurements.
  • Page 427 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Const Diagram Opens a submenu to display the constellation diagram. For further information refer to "Constellation Diagram (Modulation Analysis) – digital TV" on page 4.219. Remote: CONF:DTV:MEAS CONS Remote: TRAC? TRACE1 Zoom Opens the Select Constellation Zoom Mode dialog box to set the zoom: <...
  • Page 428 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Unit Opens the Unit dialog box to select the unit: s, m. Remote: CALC:DTV:UNIT:POW:EPAT M Zoom Opens an edit dialog box to zoom onto the echo pattern measurement, around 0 Ms. The zoom factor can vary from 1 to 20.
  • Page 429 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Remote: SET:TV:STAN DK (TV Standard) Remote: SOURce:DM:FORM QAM128 (Constellation) Remote: DDEM:SRAT 1000000 (Symbol Rate) Remote: DDEM:FILT:ALPH R018 (Roll–Off) Remote: DDEM:SBAN NORM (Sideband Position) Remote: DDEM:EQU OFF (Activate Equalizer) Remote: DDEM:EQU:FRE ON (Freeze Equalizer) Remote: DDEM:EQU:RES (Reset Equalizer) Channel Power Opens a submenu to measure the channel power of a digital TV signal.
  • Page 430 R&S FSL Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) Default Settings For details refer to the Default Settings softkey in the power measurement menu of the base unit. CCDF Opens a submenu to measure the complementary cumulative distribution function (CCDF) of the amplitude of a digital TV signal sampled in the complex base band.
  • Page 431 Cable TV Measurements (Option K20) R&S FSL Tilt Setup Opens the Tilt Setup dialog box to define a filter for the Tilt measurement. The following parameters can be defined for the measurement: Span full span or a limited frequency range Modulation Standards channels with certain modulation standards (select one or several) or no restriction (select all)
  • Page 432 R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) The Noise Figure Measurements option provides noise figure measurements. Using this option, the noise figure of a Device Under Test, e.g. low–noise FET amplifier circuits, with noise figures of less than 1 dB can be measured.

  • Page 433: Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30)

    Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) R&S FSL To edit tables 1. Select the table header using the rotary knob or arrow keys and press rotary knob or the ENTER key to enter into the edit mode. 2. Focus the field you want to edit using the arrow keys or the rotary knob. 3.
  • Page 434 R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) If the second stage correction is activated (Measurement Settings dialog box, 2nd Stage Correction option), a separate calibration measurement is performed before the main measurement (for details on the measurement setup refer to chapter "Advanced Measurement Examples"). The data measured in the calibration measurement are used for compensation in the main measurement.
  • Page 435 Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) R&S FSL Result displays The result displays consist of two panes: • Current Value pane In the title bar of this pane, the current measurement mode of the noise figure measurement (on the left) and the calibration status of the noise figure measurement (on the right, if the second stage correction is switched on) are displayed.
  • Page 436 R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) Fig. 4-26 Graphical result display (example) Fig. 4-27 Tabular result display (example) • fixed frequency results Under Current Value, the measurement results for the fixed frequency are displayed and continuously updated. The Frequency List Results do not change – these are the results of the last frequency list measurement.
  • Page 437 Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) R&S FSL Status bar information The status bar displays the following information: • parameter values If a parameter in a settings dialog box is selected, the minimum and maximum values for the selected parameter are displayed. If a Boolean or an enumarated parameter in a dialog box is selected, the minimum and maximum values are displayed as N/A for not applicable.
  • Page 438 R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) Freq Settings Opens the Frequency Settings dialog box. Alternatively, this dialog box is opened by pressing the FREQ key (with focus on the Start Freq field). The Frequency Settings dialog box contains the following elements: Frequency Settings Start Freq Stop Freq...
  • Page 439 Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) R&S FSL Start Freq Specifies the start frequency. This is the first receive frequency (RF) entry in the Frequency Table and the Frequency List Results (result display). If the start frequency is changed, the Frequency Table is updated accordingly. Remote: FREQ:STAR 500MHZ Stop Freq Specifies the stop frequency.
  • Page 440 R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) Image Rej Specifies the suppression applied to the second sideband. This field is only available if a frequency–converting measurement mode is selected. For details on modes refer to "Measurement modes of the noise figure measurement" on page 4.248.
  • Page 441 Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) R&S FSL Max Y–Axis Temp Symbols Gain Trace Settings Y–Axis Automatic Scaling Min Y–Axis Max Y–Axis Symbols Noise and Gain X–Axis Settings X–Axis Combined Trace Display Activates or deactivates the combined trace display of noise and gain results. The noise and gain traces are displayed in the same trace display in different colors.
  • Page 442 R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) Min Y–Axis NF/Max Y–Axis NF Specifies the minimum/maximum noise figure result that can be displayed graphically. It is only possible to enter a value, if the automatic scaling is deactivated (see Automatic Scaling option), and the y–axis is set to Noise Figure (see Y–Axis field).
  • Page 443 Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) R&S FSL ENR Settings Opens the ENR dialog box. The abbreviation ENR stands for excess noise ratio. Correct ENR values for the noise source are essential to perform accurate measurements. They are used to calculate the effective noise temperature of the noise source that in turn is used for calculation of measurement results.
  • Page 444 R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) Loss Settings Opens the LOSS dialog box to take additional losses due to cables or attenuators into account that are not considered in the calibration. Under Loss Input Settings, the additional loss between the noise source and the DUT is defined.
  • Page 445 Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) R&S FSL Loss Input Constant/Loss Output Constant Specifies the constant loss value that is used across the entire frequency range. This parameter is only editable if, in the Selection list, Constant is selected. Remote: CORR:LOSS:INP:SPOT 10 Remote: CORR:LOSS:OUTP:SPOT 10 Meas Settings Opens the Measurement Settings dialog box to modify all settings related to the overall...
  • Page 446 R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) 2nd Stage Correction Activates or deactivates the second stage correction. The calibration data recorded via the Cal softkey are used to correct the measurement results. The calibration data are stored independent of the state of the option. No correction is applied to the measurement results.
  • Page 447 Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) R&S FSL RF Attenuation Specifies the attenuation that is applied to the received RF signal. To obtain a low noise figure for the analyzer and hence more accurate noise measurements, 0 dB should be set. For high DUT power levels or critical matching, a higher setting is also possible.
  • Page 448 R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) Preamplifier Activates or deactivates the preamplifier of the R&S FSL. Remote: INP:GAIN:STAT ON Schematic Displays the schematic diagram of the test setup for the selected measurement type and the specified frequency ranges. If the frequency ranges are changed, the schematic diagram is updated accordingly.
  • Page 449 Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) R&S FSL Fig. 4-29 Schematic diagram for frequency converting measurements Build Tbl Updates the table according to the Frequency Settings (Freq Settings softkey). Exit Exits the edit mode of a table. Insert Inserts a row above the currently selected row and sets the focus on the first field of the new row.
  • Page 450 R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) Softkeys of the sweep menu (Noise mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the sweep menu in Noise mode (SWEEP key). It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 451 Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) R&S FSL Softkeys of the trace menu (Noise mode) Using the trace memory facility, you can save graphical display results (max. 3 trace sets) for comparison with subsequent measurements. This facility is recommended in order to compare and to document the effects of small changes on the DUT.
  • Page 452 R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) Data –> Mem1/Data –> Mem2/Data –> Mem3 Saves the current trace results to trace memory <n>. If a trace memory <n> contains data, the corresponding softkey has a green background. The content of the trace memory <n> is displayed via the Mem1 On/Off/Mem2 On/Off/Mem3 On/Off softkeys.
  • Page 453 Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) R&S FSL Marker to Trace Opens a dialog box to select the trace (noise figure or gain), on which the marker is to be placed. This softkey is only available if measurement results are displayed. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.60.
  • Page 454 R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) Menu / Command Command Delete Edit same contents as New menu Enable/Disable Delete Displays the Limit Line dialog box in edit mode with all fields necessary to define a new limit line. For further details see "To work with limit lines"...
  • Page 455 Noise Figure Measurements Option (K30) R&S FSL Limit Specifies the limits for the receive frequencies. Remote: CALC:LIM2:LOW –30,–40,–10,–40,–30 (lower limit line) Remote: CALC:LIM2:UPP –10,0,0,–10,–5 (upper limit line) Exit Exits the edit mode of a table. Insert Inserts a row above the currently selected row and sets the focus on the first field of the new row.

  • Page 456: 3Gpp Base Station Measurements (Option K72)

    R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) The R&S FSL equipped with the 3GPP Base Station Measurements option performs code domain power measurements on downlink signals according to the 3GPP standard (Third Generation Partnership Project, FDD mode).
  • Page 457 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) R&S FSL The code domain power measurements are performed as specified by the 3GPP standards. A signal section of approx. 20 ms is recorded for analysis and then searched through to find the start of a 3GPP FDD frame.
  • Page 458 R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) Short list of abbreviations Term or abbreviation Description base transmission station CPICH common pilot channel DPCH dedicated physical channel, data channel frequency division duplexing PCCPCH primary common control physical channel PICH paging indication channel. synchronization channel, divided into P–SCH (primary synchronization channel) and S–SCH (secondary synchronization channel) Channels of the Code Domain Channel Table and their usage...
  • Page 459 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) R&S FSL • PICH The paging indication channel is expected at code class 8 and code number 16. • DPCH The dedicated physical channel is a data channel that contains pilot symbols. The displayed channel type is DPCH.
  • Page 460 R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) Softkeys of the settings menu (3G FDD BTS mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the main menu of the 3GPP Base Station Measurements option (MENU key). It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys.
  • Page 461 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) R&S FSL Select CPICH Slot Opens an edit dialog box to enter the slot number. The chosen slot is evaluated in the Code Domain Power Diagram and is used for slot–based evaluations in the Code Domain Result Summary.
  • Page 462 R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) Scrambling Code Opens an edit dialog box to enter the scrambling code. The scrambling codes are used to distinguish between different base stations. Each base station has its own scrambling code. The scrambling code range in hexadecimal format is [0x0 …...
  • Page 463 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) R&S FSL Adjust Ref Level Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power. This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R&S FSL or limiting the dynamic range by an S/N ratio that is too small.
  • Page 464 R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) HSDPA/HSUPA On/Off Activates or deactivates the HSUPA/DPA channel detection and the display of the HSUPA/DPA channels in the channel table. The high speed channels can be detected (default settings). The modulation type (QPSK /16QAM) is detected. The high speed channel can not be detected.
  • Page 465 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) R&S FSL Softkeys of the amplitude menu (3G FDD BTS mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the amplitude menu in 3G FDD BTS mode. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 466 R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) Softkeys of the trigger menu (3G FDD BTS mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the trigger menu in 3G FDD BTS mode. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 467 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) R&S FSL Marker Zoom Opens an edit dialog box to set the number of channels. All Marker Off For details refer to the All Marker Off softkey in the trigger menu of the base unit. Softkeys of the marker–>...
  • Page 468 R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) Next Peak Mode < abs > For further details refer to the Next Peak Mode < abs > softkey in the marker–> menu of the base unit. CPICH Sets the active marker/delta marker on the common pilot channel (code number 0 for spreading factor 256;...
  • Page 469 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) R&S FSL Menu / Command Submenu / Command Submenu / Command Command Code Dom Power Diagram Code Dom Result Summary Select Channel Result Summary Normal Result Summary Extended Power CP / ACP Config # of TX Chan # of Adj Chan Channel Settings Channel Bandwidth...
  • Page 470 R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) Code Dom Channel Table Selects the Code Domain Channel Table result display. This channel assignment table can contain up to 512 entries, corresponding to the 512 codes that can be assigned within the class of spreading factor 512.
  • Page 471 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) R&S FSL indication of the absolute and relative channel power (referenced to the CPICH or the total power of the signal) – T Offs [Chips] timing offset = offset between the start of the first slot of the channel and the start of the analyzed 3GPP FDD frame Remote: CALC:FEED 'XTIM:CDP:ERR:CTAB' Remote: TRAC? CTAB...
  • Page 472 R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) If the HSDPA/HSUPA On/Off softkey is activated, the detection of channels does not depend on pilot sequences. An active channel merely has to exceed the minimum power (see Inactive Channel Threshold softkey). Therefore channels of the type HS–PDSCH are recognized as active (see also Code Dom Channel Table softkey).
  • Page 473 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) R&S FSL Result Summary Extended Extends the number of results shown in the normal Code Dom Result Summary result display (Result Summary Normal softkey) by the results listed below. This result display consists of two panes. The Global Results (upper pane) contains the results for the total signal.
  • Page 474 R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) – Symbol EVM Peak (%Pk) or average (%rms) of the results of the error vector magnitude – Modulation Type modulation type of an HSDPA channel (QPSK or 16QAM modulation) Remote: CDP:RSUM EXT Power Activates the measurement of the 3GPP FDD signal channel power and opens a submenu.
  • Page 475 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) R&S FSL # of TX Chan For further details refer to the # of TX Chan softkey in the power measurement menu of the base unit. # of Adj Chan For further details refer to the # of Adj Chan softkey in the power measurement menu of the base unit.
  • Page 476 R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) Edit ACP Limit For further details refer to the Edit ACP Limit softkey in the power measurement menu of the base unit. Power Mode For further details refer to the Power Mode softkey in the power measurement menu of the base unit.
  • Page 477 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) R&S FSL Adjust Ref Lvl For further details refer to the Adjust Ref Level softkey in the power measurement menu of the base unit. Activates the Adjacent–Channel Power measurement and opens a submenu for configuration. This measurement is identical to the ACP measurement of the base unit (see CP, ACP, MC–...
  • Page 478 R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) Additional to the graphical result display, the peak list displays the peaks of the frequency ranges specified by the 3GPP specification. The table contains the following information: Tx Power power of the transmission channel Tx Bandwidth bandwidth used to measure the Tx power Range...
  • Page 479 3GPP Base Station Measurements (Option K72) R&S FSL 31 dBm P < 39 dBm P < 31 dBm The power at the different frequency offsets is compared with the selected limit line. Remote: CALC:LIM:ESP:MODE MAN Remote: CALC:LIM:ESP:VAL 39 Limit Line User Opens the lines menu of the base unit and switches to the standard limit line handling of the base unit.
  • Page 480 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) The R&S FSL equipped with the CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer option performs Code Domain measurements on forward link signals according to the 3GPP2 Standard (Third Generation Partnership Project 2). The "Recommended Minimum Performance Standard for CDMA2000 Spread Spectrum Base Stations", C.S0010–C version 2.0 dated March 2006, is taken as a basis.
  • Page 481 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL To display help to a softkey, press the HELP key and then the softkey for which you want to display help. To close the help window, press the ESC key. For further information refer to section "How to use the Help System"...

  • Page 482: Cdma2000 Bts Analyzer (Option K82)

    R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) To edit a channel table 1. Enter the Channel Table Settings menu and the corresponding dialog box is displayed. 2. Select the channel table to be edited by marking the check box. 3. Press the Edit softkey and the Edit Channel Table dialog box is displayed. Each row in the table represents one channel.
  • Page 483 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Measurements and result display The CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer option provides the following test measurement types and result displays. All measurements and result displays are accessed via the MEAS key (measurement menu)."Code Domain Analysis" on page 4.298 –...
  • Page 484 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Parameter Defined in Frontend Settings dialog box, Ref. Level Offset field Ref. Lvl Offset Result Settings dialog box, Channel (Code) Number field Channel Symbol Rate Automatically calculated (see Add Channel softkey) In the default setting after the preset, the analyzer is in Spectrum Analyzer mode (for details see "Initializing the Configuration –...
  • Page 485 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Signal Channel Power The Power measurement analyses the RF signal power of a single channel with 1.2288 MHz bandwidth over a single trace. The displayed results are based on the root mean square. The configuration is according to the CDMA2000 requirements.
  • Page 486 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Transferred parameter # of Adjacent Channels Sweep Time Span Fast ACP Mode For details on the softkeys of the Adjacent Channel Power measurement refer to the Adjacent Channel Power softkey in the measurement menu. Spectrum Emission Mask (see Spectrum Emission Mask softkey) The default settings of the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement are listed in the table below.
  • Page 487 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Transferred parameter Reference Level Ref Level Offset Sweep Time Span For details on the softkeys of the Occupied Bandwidth measurement see Occupied Bandwidth in the measurement menu. Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) The CCDF measurement displays the CCDF and the Crest factor. The CCDF shows distribution of the signal amplitudes.
  • Page 488 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Predefined Channel Tables Predefined channel tables offer access to a quick configuration for the channel search. The CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer option provides the following set of channel tables compliant with the CDMA2000 specification: •...
  • Page 489 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Table 4-11: Base station channel table for main branch in radio configuration 4 Channel type Number of Radio Code channel channels configuration (Walsh Code.SF) F-PICH – 0.64 F-SYNC – 32.64 F-PCH – 1.64 CHAN 9.128 10.128...
  • Page 490 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Relationship between channel type and modulation type Channel type Channel Modulation F-PICH Pilot channel BPSK F-SYNC Synchronisation channel BPSK F-PCH Paging channel BPSK F-TDPICH Transmit diversity pilot channel BPSK F-APICH Auxiliary pilot channel BPSK F-ATDPICH Auxiliary transmit diversity channel...
  • Page 491 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Short list of terms and abbreviations For a more comprehensive glossary refer to the CDMA2000 standard. Term or abbreviation Description APICH auxiliary pilot channel ATDPCH auxiliary transmit diversity pilot channel broadcast channel. CACH common assignment channel CCCH common control channel...
  • Page 492 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer menu (CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer mode) "The following table shows all softkeys available in the main menu of the CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer option (MENU key). It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 493 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Menu / Command Submenu / Command Submenu / Command Command More Code Domain Error Composite EVM Peak Code Domain Error Channel Constell Screen Focus A/B Select Ch/PCG More EVM vs Symbol Composite Constell Power vs Symbol Channel Bitstream Screen Focus A/B...
  • Page 494 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Settings Overview This softkey opens the Settings Overview dialog box that visualizes the data flow of the Code Domain Analyzer and summarizes all of the current settings. In addition, the current settings can be changed via the Settings Overview dialog box.
  • Page 495 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Frontend Settings Opens the Frontend Settings dialog box. In the Frontend Settings dialog box, the following parameters can be modified: Center Ref. Level Ref. Level Offset RF Attenuation Manual RF Attenuation Auto Preamplifier Center (Frontend Settings dialog box) For details refer to the Center softkey in the frequency menu of the base unit.
  • Page 496 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) IQ Capture Settings Opens the IQ Capture Settings dialog box. In the IQ Capture Settings dialog box, the following parameters can be modified: Capture Length Swap IQ Trigger Source Trigger Polarity Trigger Offset Capture Length (IQ Capture Settings dialog box) Defines the number of power control groups (PCG) that are to be analyzed.
  • Page 497 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Trigger Polarity (IQ Capture Settings dialog box) Sets the polarity of the trigger source. Depending on the required polarity of the edge, the trigger polarity can be set to either positive or negative. The default setting is Pos. The setting only has an effect if the trigger source is external.
  • Page 498 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Antenna Diversity (Demod Settings dialog box) Activates or deactivates the orthogonal transmit diversity (two-antenna system) and defines the antenna for which the results will be displayed. Antenna 1 The signal of antenna 1 is fed in. The pilot channel (F-PICH) with channel number 0 and spreading factor 64 (0.64) is required.
  • Page 499 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Multi Carrier (Demod Settings dialog box) Activates or deactivates the Multi Carrier mode. The mode improves the processing of multi carrier signals. It allows the measurement on one carrier out of a multi carrier signal. This is done by activating a low pass filter and by using a special algorithm for signal detection on multi carrier signals.
  • Page 500 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Channel Table Settings Opens the Channel Table Settings dialog box and the corresponding submenu. Predefined channel tables are a way to customize measurements. The RECENT channel table contains the last configuration used before switching from Auto Search to Predefined. The BPC_RC4, MPC_RC1, MPC_RC4 and TDC_RC4 channel tables are included in the option per default and are configured according to the standard.
  • Page 501 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Inactive Channel Threshold (Channel Table Settings dialog box) Defines the minimum power which a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be regarded as an active channel. Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as "inactive".
  • Page 502 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Edit Opens the Edit Channel Table dialog box and the corresponding softkey menu. The dialog box contains the following items (grey fields can not be modified): Item Description Name Enter the name of the selected channel table, which will be saved under <name>.xml.
  • Page 503 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL The corresponding softkey menu contains the following items: Add Channel Delete Channel Meas Sort Save Cancel Reload Remote: CONF:CDP:CTAB:NAME "NEW_TAB" Add Channel Inserts a new channel below the one selected. The default values for a new channel are: ChannelType CHAN Walsh Ch.SF...
  • Page 504 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Sort Sorts the table according to the following rules. First off, active channels are separated from inactive channels. Within these categories sorting is then done first by the channel type (special channels like F-PICH or F-SYNC first, then data channels) and next by the spreading factor in ascending order.
  • Page 505 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL The Result Settings dialog box contains the following parameters: Power Control Group Channel (Code) Number Code Order Code Power Power Reference Normalize Power Control Group (Result Settings dialog box) In some measurements it is possible to highlight the data of a specific PCG (Power Control Group).
  • Page 506 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Code Order (Result Settings dialog box) Selects the channel sorting for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error result displays. Bit-Reverse order The channels with concentrated codes are next to one another, since the code numbers are sorted in bit–reversed order.
  • Page 507 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL By default, the power of the channels is referred to the power of the pilot channel (code number 0). The power of the pilot channel is identical over all PCGs and hence can be used as a constant reference for the result display.
  • Page 508 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) – Composite EVM on page 4.329 – Peak Code Domain Error on page 4.330 – Channel Constell on page 4.331 – EVM vs Symbol on page 4.332 – Composite Constell on page 4.332 –...
  • Page 509 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Active and inactive channels are defined via the Channel Table Settings dialog box (Settings softkey menu, Channel Table Settings softkey). The power values of the active and unassigned channels are shown in different colors. In addition, codes with alias power can occur.
  • Page 510 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) For the Code Domain Power measurement, the following parameters are determined for the channels: – Channel Type Shows type of channel ('---' for inactive channels) – Walsh Chan.SF Channel number including the spreading factor (in the form <Channel>.<SF>). –...
  • Page 511 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Fig. 4-33: Power vs PCG for an occupied channel with power control Remote: CALC2:FEED "XTIM:CDP:PVSL" Result Summary Selects the numeric result display of many measurement results. Note the effects of the Trace Mode softkey differ from other measurements. The Min Hold and Max Hold values are already given in the Min and Max columns of the Result Summary table.
  • Page 512 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Global Results Under Global Results, the measurement results that concern the total signal (that is, all channels) for the entire period of observation (that is, all PCGs) are displayed: – Carrier Frequency Error Specifies the frequency error referred to the set center frequency of the R&S FSL.
  • Page 513 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL – Composite EVM The composite EVM is the difference between the test signal and the ideal reference signal (refer to the Composite EVM softkey). – IQ Imbalance / Offset Shows the IQ imbalance and the DC offset of the signal in %. The values for IQ Imbalance and IQ Offset are only displayed in full screen mode.
  • Page 514 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) – Composite Constell on page 4.333 – Result Summary on page 4.326 – Channel Bitstream on page 4.334 – Channel Constell on page 4.332 – EVM vs Symbol on page 4.332 The following result displays take results for a channel into account: –...
  • Page 515 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Fig. 4-36: Code Domain Error Power (results for the same signal shown in Bit Reverse code order) Active and inactive channels are defined via the Channel Table Settings dialog box (Settings softkey menu, Channel Table Settings softkey). The power values of the active and inactive channels take on different colors.
  • Page 516 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal. If a channel is not detected as being active, e.g. on account of low power, the difference between the test signal and the reference signal and the composite EVM is therefore very large (see Fig.
  • Page 517 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Channel Constell Selects the Channel Constellation result display. The measurement provides information about the channel constellation at symbol level. It shows the constellation of the modulated signals of the selected channel and PCG (see Select Ch/PCG).
  • Page 518 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Composite Constell Selects the Composite Constellation result display. The measurement provides information about the constellation points at chip level. The total signal is taken into account over the selected PCG. Therefore it is not possible to select a specific channel number.
  • Page 519 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Channel Bitstream Selects the Bitstream result display. The result display provides information on the demodulated bits for the selected channel and the selected PCGs. This calculation thus takes into account the results of a channel for a specific PCG.
  • Page 520 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Fig. 4-44: Demodulated bits of a channel for one PCG Remote: CALC:FEED "XTIM:CDP:BSTR" Adjust Ref Level Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power. This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R&S FSL or limiting the dynamic range by a too small S/N ratio.
  • Page 521 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Start Opens an edit dialog box to define the start frequency. For further details refer to the Start softkey in the frequency menu of the base unit. Note that the softkey is unavailable for Code Domain and CCDF measurements. Remote: FREQ:STAR 800 MHz Stop Opens an edit dialog box to define the stop frequency.
  • Page 522 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Start For details refer to the Start softkey in the span menu of the base unit. Stop For details refer to the Stop softkey in the span menu of the base unit. Full Span For details refer to the Full Span softkey in the span menu of the base unit.
  • Page 523 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Preamp On/Off For details refer to the Preamp On/Off softkey in the amplitude menu of the base unit. Note that this softkey is only available if the hardware option RF Preamplifier B22 is installed. Scaling Opens a submenu with the following softkeys: Auto Scale Once...
  • Page 524 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Softkeys of the bandwidth menu (CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the bandwidth menu in CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer mode. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or measurement mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 525 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Softkeys of the sweep menu (CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the sweep menu in CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer mode. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or measurement mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 526 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Softkeys of the trigger menu (CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the trigger menu in CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer mode. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or measurement mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 527 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Screen Focus A/B For details refer to the Screen Focus A/B softkey in the Code Domain Analyzer root menu (main menu). Screen Size Full/Split For details refer to the Screen Size Full/Split softkey in the Code Domain Analyzer root menu (main menu).
  • Page 528 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Softkeys of the marker menu (CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the marker menu in CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer mode. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or measurement mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 529 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Percent Marker "Opens an edit dialog box to enter a probability value and to position marker 1. Thus, the power which is exceeded with a given probability can be determined very easily. If marker 1 is deactivated, it will be switched on automatically.
  • Page 530 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Next Peak For details refer to the Next Peak softkey in the MKR-> menu of the base unit. Next Peak Mode < abs> For details refer to the Next Peak Mode < abs > softkey in the MKR-> menu of the base unit. F-PICH Sets the marker to the F-PICH channel.
  • Page 531 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Menu / Command Submenu / Command Adjust Ref Level Spectrum Emission Mask Edit Sweep List List Evaluation Edit Reference Range Edit Power Classes Bandclass Load Standard Save As Standard Meas Start/Stop Restore FSL K82 Files Occupied Bandwidth % Power Bandwidth Adjust Ref Level...
  • Page 532 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Adjacent Channel Power Activates the Adjacent Channel Power measurement. In this measurement the power of the carrier and its adjacent and alternate channels is determined. For details on screen layout and default values see the description of the Adjacent Channel Power on page 4.300.
  • Page 533 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL ACP Config (Adjacent Channel Power submenu) For details on the softkey and submenus refer to the CP / ACP Config softkey in the Adjacent Channel Power submenu of the base unit. Sweep Time (Adjacent Channel Power submenu) For details refer to the Sweep Time softkey in the Adjacent Channel Power submenu of the base unit.
  • Page 534 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Edit Sweep List For details on the Edit Sweep List softkey and its submenu refer to the Edit Sweep List softkey in the Spectrum Emission Mask submenu of the base unit. List Evaluation For details on the List Evaluation softkey and its submenu refer to the List Evaluation softkey in the Spectrum Emission Mask submenu of the base unit.
  • Page 535 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Save As Standard Opens the Save As Standard dialog box, in which the currently used SEM settings and parameters can be saved and exported into an *.xml file. Enter the name of the file in the file name field.
  • Page 536 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Adjust Ref Level For details refer to the Adjust Ref Level softkey in the Code Domain Analyzer menu. Adjust Settings Automatically optimizes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration (channel bandwidth, channel spacing) within a specific frequency range (channel bandwidth). The adjustment is carried out only once.
  • Page 537 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Adjust Settings Automatically optimizes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration (channel bandwidth, channel spacing) within a specific frequency range (channel bandwidth). The adjustment is carried out only once. If necessary, the instrument settings can be changed later. Remote: CALC:STAT:SCAL:AUTO ONCE 1300.2519.12 4.352...
  • Page 538 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Hadamard and BitReverse Code Tables The following tables show the code sequences with Hadamard and BitReverse orders for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power result displays. As an example, the corresponding cells for channel 8.32 (channel number 8 for spreading factor 32) are marked to show where the different codes of this channel are located.
  • Page 539 CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) R&S FSL Table 4-15: Code table for base spreading factor 128 (part 1) 1300.2519.12 4.354 E-11...
  • Page 540 R&S FSL CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer (Option K82) Table 4-16: Code table for base spreading factor 128 (part 1) 1300.2519.12 4.355 E-11...
  • Page 541 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) The R&S FSL equipped with the 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer option performs Code Domain measurements on forward link signals according to the 3GPP2 Standard (Third Generation Partnership Project 2) high rate packet data.

  • Page 542: 1Xev-Do Bts Analyzer (Option K84)

    R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Measurements and result display The 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer option provides the following test measurement types and result displays. All measurements and result displays are accessed via the MEAS key (measurement menu). – "Code Domain Analysis" on page 4.357 –...
  • Page 543 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Parameter Setting Digital standard 1xEV-DO, Revision 0 Sweep Continuous Channel table Auto Search Trigger source Free Run Trigger offset PN offset 0 chips Inactive channel threshold -40 dB Channel type PILOT Code number Slot Capture length 3 slots...
  • Page 544 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) In order to provide a quick swap from the base unit to the 1xEV-DO0 BTS Analyzer option, some parameters are passed on. Transferred parameter Reference Level Ref Level Offset # of Samples Refer also to the Power softkey in the measurement menu. Adjacent Channel Power The Adjacent Channel Power measurement analyses the power of the TX channel and the power of adjacent and alternate channels on the left and right side of the TX channel.
  • Page 545 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement shows the quality of the measured signal by comparing the power values in the frequency range near the carrier against a spectral mask that is defined by the 3GPP2 specifications.
  • Page 546 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) In order to provide a quick swap from the base unit to the 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer option, some parameters are passed on. Transferred parameter Reference Level Ref Level Offset Sweep Time Span For details on the softkeys of the Occupied Bandwidth measurement see Occupied Bandwidth in the measurement menu.
  • Page 547 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Power vs Time The Power vs Time measurement examines a specified number of half slots. Up to 36 half slots can be captured and processed simultaneously. That means that for a standard measurement of 100 half slots only three data captures are necessary.
  • Page 548 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Channel Type Characteristics The following table shows the relationship between symbol rate, spreading factor, number of symbols, number of bits, number of chips and the channel type. Channel Spreading Symbol Rate Modulation Type Chips per Slot Symbols per Bits per Slot and Code...
  • Page 549 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Tabelle 4-17: Base station channel table DOQPSK with QPSK modulation in DATA area Channel Type Number of Code Channel (Walsh Mosulation / Channels Code.SF) Mapping Pilot 0.32 BPSK-I 2.64 (RA) BPSK-I 3.64 BPSK-I 4.64 BPSK-I 34.64...
  • Page 550 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Tabelle 4-20: Base station test model DO_IDLE for idle slot configuration Channel Type Number of Channels Code Channel (Walsh Mosulation / Code.SF) Mapping Pilot 0.32 BPSK-I 2.64 (RA) BPSK-I Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer Menu (1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the main menu of the 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer option (MENU key).
  • Page 551 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Settings Opens a submenu to configure the Code Domain Analyzer result displays with the following softkeys: – Frontend Settings – IQ Capture Settings – Demod Settings – Channel Table Settings – Result Settings Settings Overview This softkey opens the Settings Overview dialog box that visualizes the data flow of the Code Domain Analyzer and summarizes all of the current settings.
  • Page 552 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Frontend Settings Opens the Frontend Settings dialog box and corresponding softkey submenu. In the Frontend Settings dialog box, the following parameters can be modified: Center Ref Level Ref Level Offset RF Atten Manual RF Atten Auto Preamp On Off Center...
  • Page 553 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL IQ Capture Settings Opens the IQ Capture Settings dialog box and corresponding softkey submenu. In the IQ Capture Settings dialog box, the following parameters can be modified: Capture Length Swap IQ On Off Trigger Source Trigger Polarity Trigger Offset...
  • Page 554 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Trigger Offset For details refer to the Trigger Offset softkey in the trigger menu of the base unit. Demod Settings Opens the Demod Settings dialog box and corresponding softkey submenu. In the Demod dialog box, the following parameters can be modified: Revision 0 A Multi Carrier On Off Time Phase Estimation On Off...
  • Page 555 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL If the 2 bits within an ON/OFF keying modulation are identical, the modulation is not possible to be recognized as an ON/OFF keying modulation. If both bits are containing ‘1’ information (ON) the modulation is identical to a BPSK and will be recognized as BPSK. If both bits are containing ‘0’...
  • Page 556 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) PN Offset Set the PN (Pseudo Noise) offset. The PN offset is used to distinguish the individual base stations in a 1xEV-DO network. The PN offset determines the offset in the circulating PN sequence in multiples of 64 chips with reference to the event second clock trigger.
  • Page 557 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL The softkey menu contains the following softkeys: Copy Delete Edit Restore Default Tables Channel Table Define whether to use a predefined channel table or an automatically generated channel table in the measurements. Auto Search Searches the whole code domain (all permissible symbol rates and channel numbers) for active channels.
  • Page 558 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Creates a new channel table name that can be seen in the dialog box from then on. The name will be automatically set to 'ChannelTable'. By default, the resulting channel table is completely empty (i.e.
  • Page 559 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Meas Initiates a measurement in Automatic Channel Search mode. The measurement results are applied to the active channel table. The active channel table is overwritten without further notice. The softkey is only available if the Auto Search mode is selected in the Channel Table Settings dialog box.
  • Page 560 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Edit Opens the Edit Channel Table dialog box and the corresponding softkey menu. The dialog box contains the following items (grey fields can not be modified): Item Description Name Enter the name of the selected channel table, which will be saved under <name>.xml.
  • Page 561 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Restore Default Tables Restores the predefined channel tables (see Predefined Channel Tables on page 4.303) to their factory–set values. Existing channel tables with the same name as default channel tables are replaced by this action. In this way, you can undo unintentional overwriting. Remote: CONF:CDP:CTAB:REST Result Settings Opens the Result Settings dialog box.
  • Page 562 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) If the focus is on Slot selection, select a slot. Enter the number as a decimal. The range of the values is from 0 to (Capture Length -1). Refer to Capture Length for further details. The following measurements take results for a Slot into account: Code Domain Power,...
  • Page 563 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Mapping The mapping mode determines whether the complex signal, the I or the Q branch is analyzed in the measurement. Use manual mapping to obtain the option of examining any channel type as either a complex signal or in the I and Q branch.
  • Page 564 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Normalize Eliminates the DC offset from the signal. The default setting of the parameter is OFF. Remote: CDP:NORM OFF Screen Focus A/B Sets the focus on the selected screen. Changes apply only to the focused screen. There are no restrictions to the display of measurement results, i.e.
  • Page 565 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Code Domain Power Selects the Code Domain Power (CDP) result display. By default the display is set to relative scaling. In this result display, the total signal for one channel type is taken into account over a single slot. The R&S FSL determines the power of the different codes and plots them in a diagram.
  • Page 566 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) General Results Under General Results, the measurement results that concern the total signal or the entire period of observation are displayed. The upper part of the result display shows the global results, i.e. results for all channels: –...
  • Page 567 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL – Composite EVM The composite EVM value is the difference between the test signal and ideal reference signal (also see Composite EVM). – Max. Pwr DATA Shows the maximum power of the Data channel. This is the highest value of the I- and Q-branch of the Data channel.
  • Page 568 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) – Symbol Rate Shows the symbol rate with which the channel is transmitted. – Channel.SF Shows the code number and its associated spreading factor. – Symbol EVM Shows the peak and the mean values of the Error Vector Magnitude measurement (also see EVM vs Symbol).
  • Page 569 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Power vs Symbol Selects the Power versus Symbol result display. This result display shows the power of each symbol for the selected code (see Select Code Slot) and the Channel Type. The result display shows the absolute power at each symbol time for a selected code of a specific channel and the selected slot.
  • Page 570 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Channel Table Selects the Channel Occupancy Table analysis. In this result display all active channels are displayed. Therefore the channel table can contain up to 146 entries: one entry for Pilot and Preamble channel each, 16 entries for the Data channel and 128 entries for the MAC channel (64 on the I and Q branch respectively).
  • Page 571 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Depending on the modulation type, a symbol consists of the following bits: – BPSK: 1 bit (only the I or the Q component is assigned; in case of complex mapping a 2BPSK modulation is displayed with both the I and Q components) –...
  • Page 572 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Code Domain Error Selects the Code Domain Error Power (CDEP) result display. This result display shows the difference in power between measured and ideally generated reference signals for each code in dB. Since it is an error power, active and inactive channels can be rated jointly at a glance.
  • Page 573 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL EVM vs Symbol Selects the Symbol Error Vector Magnitude result display. The result display provides information on the EVM for the selected channel type and the selected code on symbol level. The number of symbols is in the range from 2 to 100. Evaluation of the symbol error vector magnitude for unassigned codes is possible, but the results are not valid.
  • Page 574 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Screen Focus A/B For details refer to Screen Focus A/B. Select Meas For details refer to Select Meas. Chan Type Pilot Mac Select either the Pilot or Mac channel type. For further details on the characteristics of the channel types refer to Channel Type Characteristics on page 4.363.
  • Page 575 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Adjust Ref Level Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power. This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R&S FSL or limiting the dynamic range by a too small S/N ratio.
  • Page 576 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Softkeys of the span menu (1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the span menu in 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer mode. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or measurement mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 577 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Softkeys of the amplitude menu (1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the amplitude menu in 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer mode. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or measurement mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 578 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Auto Scale Once Automatically scales the y-axis of the grid of the selected screen with respect to the measured data. The softkey is available for the following measurements: Code Domain Power, Code Domain Error, Composite EVM.
  • Page 579 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Softkeys of the bandwidth menu (1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the bandwidth menu in 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer mode. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or measurement mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 580 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Softkeys of the sweep menu (1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the sweep menu in 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer mode. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or measurement mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 581 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Softkeys of the trigger menu (1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the trigger menu in 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer mode. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or measurement mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 582 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Screen Focus A/B For details refer to the Screen Focus A/B softkey in the Code Domain Analyzer root menu. Screen Size Full/Split For details refer to the Screen Size Split/Full softkey in the Code Domain Analyzer root menu. Scaling For details refer to the Scaling softkey in the amplitude menu.
  • Page 583 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Marker 1/Marker 2/Marker 3/Marker 4/Marker Norm/Delta The Marker <no> softkey activates the corresponding marker and opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the marker to be set to. Pressing the softkey again deactivates the selected marker.
  • Page 584 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Softkeys of the marker–> menu (1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the marker–> menu in 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer mode. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or measurement mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 585 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Next Min For details refer to the Next Min softkey in the MKR-> menu of the base unit. Next Min Mode < abs> For details refer to the Next Min Mode < abs > softkey in the MKR-> menu of the base unit. Softkeys of the measurement menu (1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the measurement menu in 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer mode.
  • Page 586 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Code Domain Analyzer AActivates the Code Domain Analyzer and opens the Code Domain Analyzer menu. Select the desired result display via this menu. For details refer to Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer Menu (1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer mode).
  • Page 587 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Band Class 7 700 MHz Band Band Class 8 1800 MHz Band Band Class 9 900 MHz Band Band Class 10 Secondary 800 MHz Band Class 11 400 MHz European PAMR Band Band Class 12 800 MHz PAMR Band Band Class 13 2.5 GHz IMT-2000 Extension Band...
  • Page 588 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Spectrum Emission Mask Performs a comparison of the signal power in different carrier offset ranges with the maximum values specified in the 1xEV-DO specification. With the exception of a few softkeys this measurement is identical to the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement of the base unit. For details on screen layout and default values see the description of the Spectrum Emission Mask.
  • Page 589 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Bandclass Opens a dialog box, to select a specific bandclass. A list of the supported bandclasses can be found in the description of the Bandclass softkey in the ACP measurement menu. The settings for each bandclass are provided in *.xml files that are located in the directory C:\R_S\INSTR\sem_std\EVDO\dl.
  • Page 590 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Occupied Bandwidth Activates measurement of the bandwidth assigned to the signal. For details on screen layout and default values see the description of the Occupied Bandwidth. Also opens the Occupied Bandwidth submenu containing the following softkeys: % Power Bandwidth Channel Bandwidth Adjust Ref Level...
  • Page 591 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL CCDF Starts the measurement of the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function and the Crest factor. For details on screen layout and default values see the description of the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF). Also opens the CCDF submenu containing the following softkeys: Percent Marker Res BW # of Samples...
  • Page 592 R&S FSL 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) Power vs Time Starts the measurement of the Power vs Time. This measurement is required by the standard for the Emission Envelope Mask. For details on screen layout and default values see the description of the Power vs Time.
  • Page 593 1xEV-DO BTS Analyzer (Option K84) R&S FSL Reference Mean Pwr The standard asks for the sequence to first measure the FULL slot with the limit line relative to the mean power of the averaged time response. Therefore you should activate the Reference Mean Power for Full slot measurements.

  • Page 594: Wlan Tx Measurements (Option K91 / K91N)

    R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) The WLAN TX Measurements option extends the functionality of the R&S FSL spectrum analyzer to enable Wireless LAN TX measurements according to IEEE standards 802.11 a, b, g, j and n. TX measurement of wireless LAN Device Under Test (DUT) according to the standards specified for the device can be performed: •...
  • Page 595 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) R&S FSL Menu and softkey description – "Softkeys of the WLAN menu" on page 4.414 – "Softkeys of the sweep menu (WLAN mode)" on page 4.436 – "Softkeys of the marker menu (WLAN mode)" on page 4.437 –...
  • Page 596 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) The results can be displayed in form of a list or a graph (see also Display List/Graph softkey). – "Result summary list" on page 4.411 – "Result display graph" on page 4.412 Measurement settings The overall measurement settings used to obtain the current measurement results are displayed below the title bar (see Fig.
  • Page 597 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) R&S FSL Fig. 4-46 Result summary list (example) Result display graph Additionally to the selected graphical result display, the Magnitude Capture Buffer display is provided for all IQ measurements. The different result displays are described with the corresponding softkey. The Magnitude Capture Buffer display shows the complete range of captured data for the last sweep.
  • Page 598 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) IQ measurements can be run in split screen mode (allowing both the Magnitude Capture Buffer display and the selected IQ measurement results to be displayed simultaneously) or in full screen mode (with either the Magnitude Capture Buffer display or the selected IQ measurement results displayed).
  • Page 599 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) R&S FSL Title bar information The title bar displays the following information: • wireless LAN standard applicable to the current measurement (in the middle) Status bar information The status bar displays the following information: •...
  • Page 600 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) Menu / Command Command Constell vs Symbol/Carrier Carrier Selection More Gating Settings On/Off Import Export Y–Axis/Div R&S Support Spectrum Settings General/Demod Display List/Graph Spectrum Flatness Spectrum Mask / Spectrum IEEE/ETSI Spectrum FFT Spectrum ACPR / Spectrum ACP / ACP Rel/Abs More same contents as PVT side menu...
  • Page 601 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) R&S FSL Auto Lvl Ext Att Data Capture Settings Capture Time Burst Count Analyze Bursts Sweep Count Trigger Settings Trigger Mode Trigger Offset Power Level Auto Lvl IQ Settings Swap IQ Advanced Settings Auto Level Time Ref Level Attenuation...
  • Page 602 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) Standard (General Settings dialog box) Displays a list of all installed standards to select the wireless LAN standard. This is necessary to ensure that the measurements are performed according to the specified standard with the correct limit values and limit lines.
  • Page 603 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) R&S FSL Capture Time (General Settings dialog box) Specifies the time (and therefore the amount of data) to be captured in a single measurement sweep. Remote: SWE:TIME 10ms Burst Count (General Settings dialog box) Activates or deactivates a specified number of bursts for capture and analysis.
  • Page 604 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) Power Level (General Settings dialog box) Specifies the trigger level if the Power trigger mode is set. Remote: TRIG:LEV:POW 10 DBM Auto Lvl (General Settings dialog box) Activates or deactivates the automatic measurement of the power trigger level. The power trigger level is measured automatically at the start of each measurement sweep.
  • Page 605 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) R&S FSL Signal Field Content (Demod Settings dialog box, IEEE 802.11a, g (OFDM), j and n) Activates or deactivates the decoding of the captured burst data. Only the bursts are included in the results analysis whose modulation format specified in the signal symbol field matches the modulation format specified in the Analyze PSDU Mod field.
  • Page 606 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) Auto Demodulation Activates or deactivates the automatic detection of the modulation. If activated, the modulation applied to the input data is determined from the modulation type of the first complete burst within the captured data.
  • Page 607 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) R&S FSL Equal Burst Length (Demod Settings dialog box) Activates or deactivates the burst selection for measurement analysis according to the range or specific number of data symbols/bytes. Standard State Description IEEE 802.11a, j, n Only bursts with exactly the number of symbols specified in the Data Symbols field are considered for measurement analysis.
  • Page 608 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) Channel Estimation (Demod Settings dialog box, IEEE 802.11a, g (OFDM), j, n) Specifies how accurately the EVM results are calculated. Preamble The channel estimation is performed in the preamble as required in the standard.
  • Page 609 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) R&S FSL Level (Demod Settings dialog box) Activates or deactivates the compensation for level error. If activated, the measurement results are compensated for level error on a per–symbol basis. Remote: TRAC:LEV ON Display List/Graph Configures the result display.
  • Page 610 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) Full Burst (IEEE 802.11a, g, j – OFDM and n) Displays the PVT results in a single graph with all burst data being displayed. For further details refer to the PVT softkey. Remote: CONF:BURS:PVT:SEL FULL Rising &...
  • Page 611 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) R&S FSL Ramp Up/Down/Up & Down (IEEE 802.11b, g – Single Carrier) Sets the display of the rising/falling edge graph: Displays the rising edge graph. Down Displays the falling edge graph. Up & Down Displays the rising and falling edge graph.
  • Page 612 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) In the Gate Settings dialog box, the following parameters are set: Delay Start point of captured data to be used in results calculation, i.e. the delay from the start of the captured data in time or samples. If the delay is specified in time, the number of samples is updated accordingly, and vice versa.
  • Page 613 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) R&S FSL Y–Axis/Div Opens a dialog box to modify the y–axis settings: Auto Scaling If activated, the scaling of the y–axis is calculated automatically. Per Division Specifies the scaling to be used if Auto Scaling is deactivated. Unit Specifies the y–axis unit.
  • Page 614 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) – EVM vs Carrier (IEEE 802.11a, g, j, n – OFDM) This result display shows all EVM values recorded on a per–carrier basis over the full set of measured data. An average trace is also displayed. Remote: CONF:BURS:EVM:ESYM (EVM vs Symbol) Remote: CONF:BURS:EVM:ECAR (EVM vs Carrier) Error Frequency/Phase...
  • Page 615 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) R&S FSL Constell vs Symbol/Carrier Selects the Constallation vs Symbol or the Constellation vs Carrier result displays. – Constellation vs Symbol (all standards) This result display shows the in–phase and quadrature phase results over the full range of the measured input data.
  • Page 616 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) Carrier Selection (IEEE 802.11a, g, j, n – OFDM) Opens a dialog box to select the carrier for data display. Either a specific carrier number, pilots only or all carriers can be selected. Remote: CONF:BURS:CONS:CARR:SEL –26 Spectrum Opens a submenu for frequency measurements.
  • Page 617 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) R&S FSL Spectrum Mask (IEEE 802.11b, g – Single Carrier), Spectrum IEEE/ETSI (IEEE 802.11a, g, j, n – OFDM) Sets the Spectrum Mask result display. This result display shows power against frequency. The span of the results is 100 MHz for IEEE and 500 MHz for ETSI around the specified measurement frequency.
  • Page 618 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) Spectrum ACPR (IEEE 802.11a, g, n, OFDM Turbo Mode) Spectrum ACP (IEEE 802.11b) ACP Rel/Abs (IEEE 802.11j) Sets the ACP (Adjacent Channel Power) result display. This result display is similar to the Spectrum Mask measurement, and provides information about leakage into adjacent channels.
  • Page 619 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) R&S FSL CCDF Sets the CCDF result display. This result display shows the probability of an amplitude within the gating lines exceeding the mean power measured between the gating lines. The x–axis displays power relative to the measured mean power.
  • Page 620 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) – IEEE 802.11b or g (Single Carrier) The results are grouped by burst. Remote: CONF:BURS:STAT:BSTR Signal Field (IEEE 802.11a, g, j, n – OFDM), PLCP Header (IEEE 802.11b, g – Single Carrier) Sets the Signal Field result display or the PLCP Header result display, depending on the selected standard.
  • Page 621 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) R&S FSL PLCP Header This result display shows the decoded data from the PLCP header of the burst. The following details are listed: Column header Description Example Burst number of the decoded burst Burst 1 A colored block indicates that the burst was successfully decoded.
  • Page 622 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) Meas Single/Cont Selects the sweep mode. Single single sweep mode Cont continuous sweep mode Remote: INIT:CONT OFF (single sweep mode) Remote: INIT:CONT ON (continuous sweep mode) Auto Level Starts an automatic level detection measurement. If this softkey is pressed while a measurement is running, the current measurement is aborted and the automatic level detection measurement is started.
  • Page 623 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) R&S FSL Unzoom Cancels the marker zoom. Remote: CALC:MARK:FUNC:ZOOM 1 Marker Zoom Opens an edit dialog box to select the magnification factor for the zoom. The zoom facility is provided for the following result displays: Magnitude Capture Buffer, PVT, Constellation vs Symbol, Constellation vs Carrier.
  • Page 624 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) Softkeys of the lines menu (WLAN mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the lines menu in WLAN mode (LINES key). It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 625 WLAN TX Measurements (Option K91 / K91n) R&S FSL Screen Full/Split Changes the display between split and full screen for IQ measurement results. Frequency sweep measurement results are always displayed in full screen. Remote: DISP:FORM SING 1300.2519.12 4.440 E-11...

  • Page 626: Wimax, Wibro Measurements (Options K92/K93)

    R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) The WiMAX IEEE 802.16 OFDM, OFDMA Measurements option (R&S FSL–K93) extends the functionality of the R&S FSL to enable WiMAX IEEE 802.16e, WiBro Measurements according to the IEEE standards listed below. It includes the functionality of the WiMAX 802.16 OFDM Measurements option (R&S FSL–K92).
  • Page 627 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL To open the measurement menu If the WiMAX mode is not the active measurement mode, press the MODE key and activate the WiMAX option. If the WiMAX mode is already active, press the MENU or MEAS key. The measurement menu is displayed.
  • Page 628 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) – Spectrum FFT (see Spectrum FFT softkey) – Constellation vs Symbol (see Constell vs Symbol/Carrier softkey) – Constellation vs Carrier (IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM only, see Constell vs Symbol/Carrier softkey) – Conditional Cumulative Distribution Function (see CCDF softkey) –...
  • Page 629 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL • burst Each OFDMA symbol of a zone must contain at least one active burst, i.e. each OFDMA symbol of the zone must comprise subchannels belonging to an active burst. The zone/segment must be covered by active bursts, i.e.
  • Page 630 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Result summary list If the results are displayed in tabular form (Display Graph/List softkey), the result summary list is displayed. It shows the overall measurement results and provides limit checking for result values in accordance with the selected standard.
  • Page 631 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Fig. 4-51 Result summary list 1 for IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro (example) Fig. 4-52 Result summary list 2 for IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro (example) For details regarding how the results are calculated refer to chapter "Advanced Measurement Examples".
  • Page 632 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Fig. 4-53 Magnitude capture buffer results (example) All IQ measurements process the same signal data and as such all IQ measurement results are available after a single IQ measurement execution. IQ measurements can be run in split screen mode (allowing both the Magnitude Capture Buffer display and the selected IQ measurement results to be displayed simultaneously) or in full screen mode (with either the Magnitude Capture Buffer display or the selected IQ measurement results displayed).
  • Page 633 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL 4. Press the More softkey to change into the side menu. 5. Press the File Manager softkey to open the File Manager. 6. Under Folders, select the SMU entry. 7. Under Files, select the Current SMU WiMAX Settings entry using the RIGHTARRROW key. 8.
  • Page 634 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Menu / Command Command Import Export R&S Support EVM Constell Settings General/Demod EVM vs Symbol/Carrier Error Frequency/Phase Constell vs Symbol/Carrier Carrier Selection Constell Selection More Gating Settings On/Off Import Export Y–Axis/Div R&S Support Spectrum Settings General/Demod Display Graph/List...
  • Page 635 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Menu / Command Command Export R&S Support File Manager For the available File Manager softkeys, see the description of the File Manager softkey. Settings General/Demod Opens the General Settings dialog box or the Demod Settings dialog box. Screenshots of the dialog boxes are provided in chapter "Advanced Measurement Examples", section "Measurement Examples of the WiMAX IEEE 802.16 OFDM, OFDMA Measurements option (K93)".
  • Page 636 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Pane Field/List Standard Restrictions IQ Settings Swap IQ Result Settings RSSI, CINR avg. List Results Unit IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM Setup SMU Address IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro In the Demod Settings dialog box, the settings associated with the signal modulation are modified.
  • Page 637 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Tab/Pane Field/List or Softkey Standard Restrictions Level IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM Demod Settings Channel Estimation Range Downlink (DL) IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro Uplink (UL) IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro Bursts To Analyze Modulation Analysis Scope IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro Demodulator IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro Tracking Settings...
  • Page 638 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Frequency (General Settings dialog box) Specifies the center frequency of the signal to be measured. If the frequency is modified, the Channel No field is updated accordingly. Remote: FREQ:CENT 100MHz Channel No (General Settings dialog box, IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM) Specifies the channel to be measured.
  • Page 639 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Signal Level (General Settings dialog box) Specifies the expected level of the RF input signal. If an automatic level detection measurement has been executed, the signal level (RF) is updated. Remote: CONF:POW:EXP:RF –20 Auto Lev (General Settings dialog box) Activates or deactivates the automatic setting of the reference level for measurements.
  • Page 640 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Sweep Time (General Settings dialog box) Specifies the sweep time for the Spectrum Mask and Spectrum ACP/ACPR measurements: – If the Auto option is activated, the sweep time is calculated automatically. – If the Auto option is deactivated, specify the sweep time. Remote: SWE:ACPR:TIME 1S Remote: SWE:ACPR:TIME:AUTO OFF Sweep Count (General Settings dialog box)
  • Page 641 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Auto Level Time (General Settings dialog box) Specifies the sweep time used for the automatic level measurements. Remote: CONF:POW:AUTO:SWE:TIME 200MS Ref Level (General Settings dialog box) Specifies the reference level used for measurements. If the reference level is modified, the signal level is updated accordingly (depending on the currently selected standard and measurement type).
  • Page 642 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Burst Type (Demod Settings dialog box, IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM) Specifies the type of burst to be included in measurement analysis. Only one burst type can be selected for the measurement results. The OFDM burst type is supported. Link Mode (Demod Settings dialog box, IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM) Specifies the link mode of bursts that are to be included in measurement analysis.
  • Page 643 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL rate B) and (modulation format C, coding rate D), the signal to be analyzed must hold the following condition in order to produce correct measurement results: [A == C B == D] Remote: DEM:FORM:BAN '16QAM1/2 Subchannelization (Demod Settings dialog box, IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM) Activates or deactivates the subchannelization, if the Up Link mode is set (see Link Mode field).
  • Page 644 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Max Data Symbols (Demod Settings dialog box, IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM) Specifies the maximum number of data symbols that a burst must have to be considered in measurement analysis. This field is only available if the Equal Burst Length option is deactivated.
  • Page 645 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Uplink (UL) (Demod Settings dialog box, IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro) Displays the channel estimation performed for uplink signals. This field is for information purposes only as channel estimation for uplink signals are always performed in payload only (payload comprises pilots and data). Modulation Analysis Scope (Demod Settings dialog box, IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro) Displays the modulation formats to be analyzed.
  • Page 646 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) IDCell (Demod Settings dialog box, IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro) Specifies the downlink IDCell number and affects the definition of the preamble sequence (in conjunction with the used segments according to the Used Subchannel Bitmap setting), the pilot sequence of the first zone and the subchannel definition of the first zone.
  • Page 647 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL List Zone/Burst (IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro) Sets the focus on the Zone/Segment List or the Burst List to enter and modify data. To insert, copy, and delete rows, use the softkeys available with the Frame Config tab. The content of the selected list is graphically displayed under the Zone/Segment Map and the Burst Map respectively.
  • Page 648 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) The Burst List contains the following parameters, depending on the zone selection: Column Description Zone restrictions Provides a unique ID for the burst. This parameter is read only. The background color of this parameter reflects the modulation of the burst. If there are any errors in the burst configuration then the background of this item will be red.
  • Page 649 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL – Burst Map Displays a graphical view of the selected Burst List. The background color of each burst in the diagram match the modulation format of the burst. Any burst that is incorrectly configured is displayed with a red background.
  • Page 650 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Display Graph/List Configures the result display. The measurement results are displayed either in form of a list of measurement points or as a graphical trace. For details on the result displays refer to "Result summary list"...
  • Page 651 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Start End (IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM) Displays the results in two separate graphs, the left hand side showing the start and the right hand side showing the end of a burst (Display Graph selected), or in a list (Display List selected).
  • Page 652 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Full Subframe (IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro) Displays the results in a single graph with the minimum, mean, and maximum power profile of the subframe that contains the zone selected to be analyzed (Display Graph selected), or in two lists (Display List 1/2 selected).
  • Page 653 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Gating Settings On/Off (Spectrum Mask, Spectrum FFT, Spectrum ACPR, CCDF) Activates or deactivates gating, or opens the Gate Settings dialog box to specify range of captured data used in results calculation. Uses only the specified range of captured data in results calculation. In the Magnitude Capture Buffer trace, two vertical lines mark the specified range.
  • Page 654 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) SEM Settings (IEEE 802.16e–2005 WiBro) Opens the Spectrum Emission Mask Settings dialog box to configure the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement. SEM according to Specifies how the Spectrum Emission Mask settings and limits are applied: TTA Standard –...
  • Page 655 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Export Opens the Choose iqw file to export dialog box. Enter the path and the name of the IQ data file you want to export. Press ENTER to write the IQ data into the specified file. If the file cannot be created or there is no valid IQ data to export an error message is displayed.
  • Page 656 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) – EVM vs Symbol (IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro) This result display shows all EVM values versus the symbols of the analyzed zone. If the capture buffer contains more than one analyzed zones, the corresponding result graphs will be appended.
  • Page 657 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Remote: CONF:BURS:EVM:ESYM (EVM vs Symbol) Remote: CONF:BURS:EVM:ECAR (EVM vs Carrier) Error Frequency/Phase (IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM) Selects the Frequency Error vs Preamble or the Phase Error vs Preamble result displays. These result displays show the error values recorded over the preamble part of the burst. A minimum, average and maximum trace are displayed.
  • Page 658 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Constell vs Symbol/Carrier Selects the Constellation vs Symbol or the Constellation vs Carrier result displays. – Constellation vs Symbol (IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM) This result display shows the in–phase and quadrature phase results over the full range of the measured input data.
  • Page 659 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL – Constellation vs Carrier (IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM) This result display shows the in–phase and quadrature phase results over the full range of the measured input data plotted on a per–carrier basis. The magnitude of the in–phase and quadrature part is shown on the y–axis, both are displayed as separate traces (I–>...
  • Page 660 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) This softkey is only available for the above mentioned measurements if trace data are displayed. Remote: DISP:WIND2:TRAC1:Y:AUTO ON (Auto Scaling) Remote: DISP:WIND2:TRAC1:Y:PDIV 2 (Per Division) Remote: UNIT:EVM PCT (Unit – EVM vs Symbol/Carrier) Remote: UNIT:PRE HZ (Unit –...
  • Page 661 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL – Spectrum Flatness and Spectrum Flatness Group Delay (IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro) This result display shows the average energy of the constellations for the physical carriers. The limit lines are displayed according to the requirements of the standard. The minimum, mean, and maximum statistics is performed over the analyzed zones in the capture buffer.
  • Page 662 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) – Spectrum Flatness Difference (IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro) This result display shows the absolute difference of adjacent carriers. The limit lines are displayed according to the requirements of the standard. The minimum, mean, and maximum statistics is performed over the analyzed zones in the capture buffer.
  • Page 663 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL – Spectrum IEEE (IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM) – Spectrum IEEE (IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA) – Spectrum ETSI (IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM) 1300.2519.12 4.478 E-11...
  • Page 664 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) – Spectrum ETSI (IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA) – IEEE 802.16e–2005 WiBro Remote: CONF:BURS:SPEC:MASK Remote: CONF:BURS:SPEC:MASK:SEL IEEE Remote: CONF:BURS:SPEC:MASK:SEL ETSI Spectrum FFT Sets the Spectrum FFT result display in graphical form (Display Graph selected), or in tabular form (Display List 1/2 selected).
  • Page 665 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL – IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM – IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro Remote: CONF:BURS:SPEC:FFT ACPR Abs/Rel Sets the ACPR (Adjacent Channel Power Relative) result display in graphical form (Display Graph selected), or in tabular form (Display List 1/2 selected). This result display is similar to the Spectrum Mask measurement, and provides information about leakage into adjacent channels.
  • Page 666 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) – IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM – IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro Remote: CONF:BURS:SPEC:ACPR Remote: CONF:BURS:SPEC:ACPR:SEL ABS Remote: CALC2:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? (result query) Remote: CALC2:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES:MAXH? (result query) ACP Settings Opens the ACP Settings dialog box to configure the ACPR result display. By default, the ACP settings are derived from the General Settings dialog box, Channel BW field.
  • Page 667 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Pane Field Description by the ACP measurement. Adjacent, Specifies the bandwidth of the first to fifth channel before and Alternate 1, after the transmit channel to be measured. Alternate 2, Alternate 3, Alternate 4 ACP Channel Spacing Adjacent, Specifies the spacing of the first to fifth channel before and...
  • Page 668 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) – IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro Remote: CONF:BURS:STAT:CCDF Bitstream Sets the Bitstream result display in graphical form (Display Graph selected), or in tabular form (Display List 1/2 selected). – IEEE 802.16–2004 OFDM This result display shows the demodulated data stream. These results are grouped by burst and symbol.
  • Page 669 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL detected pilot sequence does not match that according to the standard) are highlighted with a red background. The amount of data displayed in the Bitstream result display can be reduced via the Bit Selection softkey.
  • Page 670 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) – IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro This result display provides information about the bursts from the analyzed zone, i.e. modulation of the burst, power boosting information, EVM of the burst. Each analyzed zone will produce a set of burst results. Remote: CONF:BURS:STAT:BSUM Bit Selection (IEEE 802.16e–2005 OFDMA/WiBro) Opens a dialog box for filtering the displayed results.
  • Page 671 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Depending on the focus, the following softkeys are provided: – Recall – New Folder – Copy – Paste – Rename – Delete File For further information refer to section "Instrument Functions – Basic Settings", "Saving and Recalling Settings Files –...
  • Page 672 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Refresh Updates the current measurement results with respect to the current gate settings. This softkey is only available if the measurement results are effected by the gate settings (Spectrum FFT, CCDF, Spectrum Mask, Spectrum ACPR) and if the gate settings are modified after a measurement result has been obtained.
  • Page 673 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) R&S FSL Marker Off Switches off all makers in the active result display. Remote: CALC2:MARK:AOFF Softkeys of the marker–> menu (WiMAX mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the marker–> menu in WiMAX mode (MKR–> key). It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys.
  • Page 674 R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (Options K92/K93) Softkeys of the trace menu (WiMAX mode) The following table shows all softkeys available in the trace menu in WiMAX mode (TRACE key). It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.

  • Page 675: Instrument Functions - Basic Settings

    Instrument Functions - Basic Settings R&S FSL Instrument Functions - Basic Settings In this section, all basic settings functions of the R&S FSL and their application are explained in detail. The analyzer functions are described in section "Instrument Functions - Analyzer". For every key a table is provided in which all submenus and corresponding commands are listed.
  • Page 676 R&S FSL Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key General Settings, Printout and Instrument Settings After putting the instrument into operation and becoming familiar with the handling of the instrument (for details see Quick Start Guide), the preparations for measurements can start. In this section the general settings of the instrument, the data management and the processing of measurement results are described.

  • Page 677: Instrument Setup And Interface Configuration - Setup Key

    Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key R&S FSL Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key The SETUP key is used to set or display the default settings of the instrument: reference frequency, noise source, level correction values, date, time, LAN interface, firmware update and enabling of options, information about instrument configuration and service support functions.
  • Page 678 R&S FSL Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key Menu Command Submenu / Command Submenu / Command Command Network Address Computer Name IP Address Subnet Mask DHCP On/Off LAN Status On/Off Info Password Description LAN Reset GPIB GPIB Address ID String Factory ID String User GPIB Language...
  • Page 679 Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key R&S FSL Menu Command Submenu / Command Submenu / Command Command Soft Frontpanel More Firmware Update Firmware Update Option Licenses Install Option Shutdown Off/Standby System Info Hardware Info Versions+Options System Messages Clear All Messages Service Input RF/Cal/TG Comb Frequency...
  • Page 680 R&S FSL Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key Transducer Opens the Select Transducer dialog box and a submenu to activate or deactivate defined transducer factors, to generate new transducer factors or to edit existing ones. In the Select Transducer dialog box, a transducer factor can be edited, deleted or copied, if selected, using the corresponding softkeys.
  • Page 681 Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key R&S FSL Edit Name Sets the focus on the Name field to enter a file name. The extension is added automatically. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.10. Remote: CORR:TRAN:SEL <name> Edit Unit Sets the focus on the Unit field to select the unit.
  • Page 682 R&S FSL Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key Delete Deletes the selected factor after confirmation. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.10. Remote: CORR:TRAN DEL Ref Level Adjust Man/Auto Activates or deactivates the automatic adjustment of the reference level to the selected transducer factor.
  • Page 683 Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key R&S FSL Alignment Opens a submenu with the available functions for recording, displaying and activating the data for self alignment. The correction data and characteristics required for the alignment are determined by comparison of the results at different settings with the known characteristics of the high-precision calibration signal source at 65.83 MHz.
  • Page 684 R&S FSL Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key Configure Network Opens the Network Connections dialog box to change the LAN settings. For details refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 2 "Preparing for Use" and appendix B "LAN Interface". Network Address Opens a submenu to configure the internet protocol properties and the computer name.
  • Page 685 Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key R&S FSL Opens the LXI submenu containing the following softkeys: LAN Status On/Off Info Password Description LAN Reset LAN Status On/Off Activates the LAN status bar that shows the current status of the LAN connection. Depending on the status of the connection, the LXI logo in the LAN Status Indicator window assumes the following states: No connection is established...
  • Page 686 R&S FSL Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key Description Opens a dialog box to view or change the LXI instrument description. This description is used on some of the LXI web sites. By default, the description is 'Spectrum Analyzer/FSL/Serial #' This softkey is availbale from firmware version 1.90.
  • Page 687 Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key R&S FSL GPIB Language (option GPIB Interface, B10 only) Only the remote control language SCPI is available for the R&S FSL and is set by default. Remote: SYST:LANG 'SCPI' Display Update On/Off Defines whether the instrument display is switched off when changing from manual operation to remote control.
  • Page 688 R&S FSL Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key Meas Display Opens a submenu to configure the display and the print colors. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.10. Screen Title Activates/deactivates the display of a diagram title (if available) and opens an edit dialog box to enter a new title for the active diagram.
  • Page 689 Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key R&S FSL Select Screen Color Set Opens the Select Screen Color Set dialog box to select default or user defined color settings. If one of the default settings is selected (Default Colors 1/2), the default settings for brightness, color tint and color saturation for all display screen elements are restored.
  • Page 690 R&S FSL Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key Set to Default Opens the Set to Default dialog box to select one of the factory default color settings. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.10. Remote: DISP:CMAP:DEF2 (screen colors) Remote: HCOP:CMAP:DEF2 (print colors) Print Colors Opens a submenu to select the colors for the printout.
  • Page 691 Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key R&S FSL Display Pwr Save On/Off Switches the power-save mode for the display on/off and opens an edit dialog box to enter the time for the power-save function to respond. After the elapse of this time the display is completely switched off, i.e.
  • Page 692 R&S FSL Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key Option Licenses Opens a submenu to install options. For details on options refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 3 "Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options". Install Option Opens an edit dialog box to enter the license key for the option that you want to install. A message box open if an option is about to expire or has already expired (in which case all functions (including remote control) are unavailable until the R&S FSL is rebooted).
  • Page 693 Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key R&S FSL System Messages Opens the System Messages dialog box that displays the generated system messages in the order of their occurrence. The most recent messages are placed at the top of the list. Messages that have occurred since the last display of system messages menu are marked with an asterisk '*'.
  • Page 694 R&S FSL Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key Comb Frequency Opens a dialog box to set the comb generator frequency for the internal calibration: Comb/1 65.8333 MHz / 1 Comb/64 65.8333 MHz / 64 Comb/65 65.8333 MHz / 65 Remote: Sine: DIAG:SERV:INP:PULS OFF Remote: Comb: DIAG:SERV:INP:PULS ON Remote: Comb: DIAG:SERV:INP:PRAT COMB64...

  • Page 695: Saving And Recalling Settings Files - File Key

    Saving and Recalling Settings Files - FILE Key R&S FSL Saving and Recalling Settings Files - FILE Key The FILE key is used to store and load instrument settings and to manage stored files. The file menu includes functions for storing (Save softkey) instrument settings such as instrument configurations (measurement/display settings, etc) and measurement results on permanent storage media, or to load (Recall softkey) stored data back onto the instrument.
  • Page 696 R&S FSL Saving and Recalling Settings Files - FILE Key Navigation in the dialog boxes for saving and loading settings files The Save and Recall dialog boxes are used to save and recall settings files. For both dialog boxes, the same navigation principle applies.
  • Page 697 Saving and Recalling Settings Files - FILE Key R&S FSL Softkeys of the file menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the file menu. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
  • Page 698 R&S FSL Saving and Recalling Settings Files - FILE Key Menu / Command Submenu / Command Command Disconnect Network Drive Export Import Hardcopy Save Opens the Save dialog box to define and store the settings file. To navigate in the dialog box and define/enter data, use the corresponding softkeys.
  • Page 699 Saving and Recalling Settings Files - FILE Key R&S FSL Edit File Name Sets the focus on the File Name field. In the Save dialog box, the field already contains a suggestion for a new name: the file name used in the last saving process is counted up to the next unused name. For example, if the name last used was "test_004", the new name "test_005"...
  • Page 700 R&S FSL Saving and Recalling Settings Files - FILE Key Disable all Items Selects none of the items for saving or loading. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.70. Remote: MMEM:SEL:NONE Delete File Deletes the selected settings file. Remote: MMEM:CLE:STAT 1,'TEST' Recall Opens the Recall dialog box to load a settings file.
  • Page 701 Saving and Recalling Settings Files - FILE Key R&S FSL File Manager Opens the File Manager dialog box and a submenu to manage mass storage media and files. In the upper left corner, the current drive is displayed. Below the folders and subfolders of the current directory are displayed.
  • Page 702 R&S FSL Saving and Recalling Settings Files - FILE Key Delete Deletes the selected item after confirmation. For details on navigation see also "Navigation in the file manager" on page 4.511. Remote: MMEM:DEL "test01.hcp" Remote: MMEM:RDIR "C:\R_S\Instr\user\TEST" Sort Mode Opens a submenu to select the sorting mode for the displayed files. The entry for the next higher directory level ("..") and the folders are always located at the top of the list.
  • Page 703 Saving and Recalling Settings Files - FILE Key R&S FSL Map Network Drive Sets the focus on the Drive list. For further information refer to the Quick Start Guide. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.70. Remote: MMEM:NETW:MAP 'T:','\\server\folder' Remote: MMEM:NETW:USED ON Remote: MMEM:NETW:UNUS? Disconnect Network Drive...

  • Page 704: Manual Operation - Local Menu

    R&S FSL Manual Operation - Local Menu Manual Operation - Local Menu When switched on, the instrument is always in the manual measurement mode and can be operated via the front panel. As soon as the instrument receives a remote command, it is switched to the remote control mode.

  • Page 705: Measurement Documentation - Print Key

    Measurement Documentation - PRINT Key R&S FSL Measurement Documentation - PRINT Key The PRINT key is used to select and configure the printer and to customize the screen printout. For detailed information on printer selection and installation refer to the Quick Start Guide. To open the print menu Press the PRINT key.
  • Page 706 R&S FSL Measurement Documentation - PRINT Key Path Directory in which the file is stored. The default path is C:\r_s\instr\user Files List of the existing files in the same format File Name Name of the file Remote: HCOP:ITEM:ALL Remote: HCOP Remote: HCOP:NEXT Device Setup Opens the Hardcopy Setup dialog box to define the output: image file, clipboard, or the printer.
  • Page 707 Measurement Documentation - PRINT Key R&S FSL Select Object For details see Select Object softkey of the setup menu. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.10. Predefined Colors For details see Predefined Colors softkey of the setup menu. This softkey is available from firmware version 1.10. User Defined Colors For details see User Defined Colors softkey of the setup menu.
  • Page 708 R&S FSL Introduction Contents of Chapter 5 5 Remote Control – Basics..................5.1 Introduction............................5.1 Getting Started..........................5.3 Setting the Remote Control (IP/GPIB) Address ................5.3 Starting Remote Control ........................5.4 Returning to Manual Operation.......................5.4 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax ...................5.5 Structure of a Command ......................5.5 Structure of a Command Line ....................5.7 Responses to Queries......................5.8 Parameters..........................5.8...
  • Page 709 Introduction R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements (K30) – Status Reporting System..........5.37 STATus:OPERation Register ....................5.37 STATus:QUEStionable Register ....................5.38 STATus:QUEStionable:CORRection Register...............5.38 Error Reporting........................5.38 3GPP Base Station Measurements (K72) – Status Reporting System ........5.39 STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC Register .................5.39 CDMA2000 (K82) and 1xEV-DO (K84) BTS Analyzer – Status Reporting System ....5.40 STATus:QUEstionable:SYNC Register..................5.40 WLAN TX Measurements (K91/K91n) –...

  • Page 710: Remote Control - Basics

    R&S FSL Introduction Remote Control – Basics This chapter assumes basic knowledge of programming and operation of the controller. It provides the following: • Instructions on how to put the R&S FSL into operation via remote control. • A general introduction to remote control of programmable instruments. This includes the description of the command structure and syntax according to the SCPI standard, the description of command execution and of the status registers.
  • Page 711 Introduction R&S FSL The modules visa32.bas and vpptype.bas can be found in the <VXIpnpPath>\WinNT\include (typically C:\VXIpnp\WinNt\include). Note: Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience. In contrast, the priority of remote control is the "predictability" of the device status. Therefore, control programs should always define an initial device status (e.g.

  • Page 712: Getting Started

    R&S FSL Getting Started Getting Started The short and simple operating sequence below shows how to put the instrument into operation and quickly set its basic functions. The remote control address, which is factory–set to 10.0.0.10, subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for LAN operation and 20 for operation via GPIB, is used. If you want to change the IP address, see "Setting the Remote Control (IP/GPIB) Address".

  • Page 713: Starting Remote Control

    Starting Remote Control R&S FSL Starting Remote Control On power–on, the instrument is always in the manual operating state ("local" state) and can be operated via the front panel. To start remote control Send an addressed command from a controller to the instrument. The instrument is switched to remote control ("remote"...

  • Page 714: Scpi Command Structure And Syntax

    R&S FSL SCPI Command Structure and Syntax SCPI Command Structure and Syntax SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) describes a standard command set for programming instruments, irrespective of the type of instrument or manufacturer. The goal of the SCPI consortium is to standardize the device–specific commands to a large extent. For this purpose, a model was developed which defines the same functions inside a device or for different devices.
  • Page 715 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax R&S FSL SENSe FREQuency BANDwidth FUNCtion DETector CENTer STOP SPAN OFFSet STARt Fig. 5–1 Tree structure the SCPI command systems using the SENSe system as example • Multiple key words Some key words occur in several levels within one command system. Their effect depends on the structure of the command, i.e.

  • Page 716: Structure Of A Command Line

    R&S FSL SCPI Command Structure and Syntax • Numeric suffix If a device features several functions or features of the same kind, e.g. inputs, the desired function can be selected by a suffix added to the command. Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with the suffix 1.

  • Page 717: Responses To Queries

    SCPI Command Structure and Syntax R&S FSL Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command. According to SCPI, the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488.2.
  • Page 718 R&S FSL SCPI Command Structure and Syntax – UP/DOWN UP, DOWN increases or reduces the numerical value by one step. The step width can be specified via an allocated step command (see annex C, List of Commands) for each parameter which can be set via UP, DOWN.

  • Page 719: Overview Of Syntax Elements

    SCPI Command Structure and Syntax R&S FSL Overview of Syntax Elements The following survey offers an overview of the syntax elements. The colon separates the key words of a command. In a command line the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level. The semicolon separates two commands of a command line.

  • Page 720: Instrument Model And Command Processing

    R&S FSL Instrument Model and Command Processing Instrument Model and Command Processing The block diagram in Fig. 5–2 shows how SCPI commands are serviced in the instrument. The individual components work independently and simultaneously. They communicate with each other by means of so–called "messages".
  • Page 721 Instrument Model and Command Processing R&S FSL Data base and instrument hardware Here the expression "instrument hardware" denotes the part of the instrument fulfilling the actual instrument function – signal generation, measurement etc. The controller is not included. The term "data base"...

  • Page 722: Command Sequence And Command Synchronization

    R&S FSL Instrument Model and Command Processing Command Sequence and Command Synchronization What has been said above makes clear that all commands can potentially be carried out overlapping. In order to prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of the commands *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI must be used.

  • Page 723: Status Reporting System

    Status Reporting System R&S FSL Status Reporting System The status reporting system (refer to Fig. 5–4) stores all information on the present operating state of the instrument, and on errors which have occurred. This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue.
  • Page 724 R&S FSL Status Reporting System PTRansition part The Positive–TRansition part acts as an edge detector. When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1, the associated PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1. PTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.

  • Page 725: Overview Of The Status Registers

    Status Reporting System R&S FSL Overview of the Status Registers The following figure shows the status registers used by the R&S FSL base unit. The status registers used by the R&S FSL options are described in separate sections at the end of this chapter. not used not used not used...

  • Page 726: Status Byte (Stb) And Service Request Enable Register (Sre)

    R&S FSL Status Reporting System Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE) The STB is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers. It can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy.

  • Page 727: Ist Flag And Parallel Poll Enable Register (Ppe)

    Status Reporting System R&S FSL IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE) By analogy with the SRQ, the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit. It can be read by means of a parallel poll (refer to section "Parallel Poll") or using the command *IST?.

  • Page 728: Status:operation Register

    R&S FSL Status Reporting System STATus:OPERation Register In the CONDition part, this register contains information on which actions the instrument is being executing or, in the EVENt part, information on which actions the instrument has executed since the last reading. It can be read using the commands STATus:OPERation:CONDition? or STATus :OPERation[:EVENt]?.

  • Page 729: Status:questionable:acplimit Register

    Status Reporting System R&S FSL Bit No. Meaning CALibration The bit is set if a measurement is performed unaligned (label UNCAL) LIMit (device–specific) This bit is set if a limit value is violated (see also section "STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register") LMARgin (device–specific) This bit is set if a margin is violated (see also section "STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register")

  • Page 730: Status:questionable:frequency Register

    R&S FSL Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning ALT2 LOWer FAIL This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel. ALT3 … 11 LOWer/UPPer FAIL This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in one off the lower or upper alternate channels 3 …...

  • Page 731: Status:questionable:limit Register

    Status Reporting System R&S FSL STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register This register contains information about the observance of limit lines. It can be read using the commands STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit[:EVENt]?. Table 5–9 Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register Bit No. Meaning LIMit 1 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated.

  • Page 732: Status:questionable:power Register

    R&S FSL Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning LMARgin 3 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 3 is violated. LMARgin 4 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 4 is violated. LMARgin 5 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 5 is violated. LMARgin 6 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 1 is violated.

  • Page 733: Status:questionable:sync Register

    Status Reporting System R&S FSL STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC Register This register contains information about sync and bursts not found, and about pre–measurement results exceeding or falling short of expected values (for details on GSM power measurements refer to chapter "Advanced Measurement Examples", and the Quick Start Guide, chapter 5, "Basic Measurement Examples").

  • Page 734: Application Of The Status Reporting Systems

    R&S FSL Status Reporting System Application of the Status Reporting Systems In order to be able to effectively use the status reporting system, the information contained there must be transmitted to the controller and further processed there. There are several methods which are represented in the following.

  • Page 735: Query By Means Of Commands

    Status Reporting System R&S FSL The parallel poll method is mainly used to find out quickly which one of the instruments connected to the controller has sent a service request. To this effect, SRE and PPE must be set to the same value. Query by Means of Commands Each part of any status register can be read by means of queries.

  • Page 736: Reset Values Of The Status Reporting System

    R&S FSL Status Reporting System Reset Values of the Status Reporting System Table 5–13 contains the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be reset. None of the commands, except *RST and SYSTem:PRESet, influences the functional instrument settings.

  • Page 737: Interfaces And Protocols

    Interfaces and Protocols R&S FSL Interfaces and Protocols The standard instrument is accessed via LAN in order to perform for remote control. Optional a GPIB interface can be used for remote control, provided by option GPIB Interface, R&S FSL–B10. LAN Interface To be integrated in a LAN, the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface, consisting of a connector, a network interface card and protocols (VXI–11 and RSIB).
  • Page 738 R&S FSL Interfaces and Protocols A VXI–11 link between a controller and an instrument uses three channels: core, abort and interrupt channel. Instrument control is mainly performed on the core channel (program, response and low–level control messages). The abort channel is used for immediate abort of the core channel; the interrupt channel transmits spontaneous service requests of the instrument.

  • Page 739: Vxi-11 Interface Messages

    Interfaces and Protocols R&S FSL VXI–11 Interface Messages On the Ethernet link, the interface messages are called low–level control messages. These messages can be used to emulate interface messages of the GPIB. Table 5–14 VXI–11 Interface Messages Command Effect on the instrument &ABO (Abort) Aborts the processing of the commands just received.

  • Page 740: Rsib Interface Functions

    R&S FSL Interfaces and Protocols RSIB Interface Functions The library functions are adapted to the interface functions of National Instruments for GPIB programming. The functions supported by the libraries are listed in the following table. Function Description RSDLLibfind() Provides a handle for access to a device. RSDLLibwrt() Sends a zero–terminated string to a device.
  • Page 741 Interfaces and Protocols R&S FSL Error variable – iberr If the ERR bit (8000h) is set in the status word, iberr contains an error code which allows the error to be specified in greater detail. Extra error codes are defined for the RSIB protocol, independent of the National Instruments interface.

  • Page 742: Gpib Interface (Option R&S Fsl-B10)

    R&S FSL Interfaces and Protocols GPIB Interface (Option R&S FSL–B10) The standard instrument is not equipped with an GPIB connector, but can be accessed via the LAN interface for remote control. The option R&S FSL–B10 provides a GPIB interface. For details on the connector and its use refer to the Quick Start Guide, chapter 1 "Front and Rear Panel".

  • Page 743: Gpib Interface Functions

    Interfaces and Protocols R&S FSL GPIB Interface Functions Instruments which can be remote controlled via the GPIB can be equipped with different interface functions. Table 5–1 lists the interface functions appropriate for the instrument. Table 5–1 Interface functions Control character Interface function Handshake source function (source handshake), full capability Handshake sink function (acceptor handshake), full capability...
  • Page 744 R&S FSL Interfaces and Protocols Table 5–2 Universal Commands Command QuickBASIC command Effect on the instrument DCL (Device Clear) IBCMD (controller%, Aborts the processing of the commands CHR$(20)) just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state.

  • Page 745: Instrument Messages

    Interfaces and Protocols R&S FSL Instrument Messages For different interfaces, device messages are more or less alike. They are divided into two groups, depending on the direction they are sent: commands and device responses. Commands Commands (program messages) are messages the controller sends to the instrument. They operate the device functions and request information.

  • Page 746: Noise Figure Measurements (K30) - Status Reporting System

    R&S FSL Noise Figure Measurements (K30) – Status Reporting System Noise Figure Measurements (K30) – Status Reporting System Additionally to the registers provided by the base system, the following registers are used or modified in the Noise Figure Measurements option (K30): •...

  • Page 747: Status:questionable Register

    Noise Figure Measurements (K30) – Status Reporting System R&S FSL STATus:QUEStionable Register Additionally to the bits assigned by the base system (for details refer to STATus:QUEStionable Register), the bit no. 11 is defined differently: Bit No Meaning CORRection This bit is set if a questionable correction data occurs (see also section STATus:QUEStionable:CORRection Register).

  • Page 748: 3Gpp Base Station Measurements (K72) - Status Reporting System

    R&S FSL 3GPP Base Station Measurements (K72) – Status Reporting System 3GPP Base Station Measurements (K72) – Status Reporting System Additionally to the registers provided by the base system, the following registers are used or modified in the 3GPP Base Station Measurements option (K72): •...

  • Page 749: Cdma2000 (K82) And 1Xev-Do (K84) Bts Analyzer - Status Reporting System

    CDMA2000 (K82) and 1xEV-DO (K84) BTS Analyzer – Status Reporting SystemR&S FSL CDMA2000 (K82) and 1xEV-DO (K84) BTS Analyzer – Status Reporting System Additionally to the registers provided by the base system, the following register is used in the CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer option (K82): •...

  • Page 750: Wlan Tx Measurements (K91/K91N) - Status Reporting System

    WLAN TX Measurements (K91/K91n) - Status Reporting System R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (K91/K91n) – Status Reporting System Additionally to the registers provided by the base system, the following registers are used or modified in the WLAN TX Measurements option (K91/K91n): •...
  • Page 751 WLAN TX Measurements (K91K91n) – Status Reporting System R&S FSL STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register This register comprises information about the observance of limit lines in the corresponding measurement window (LIMit 1 corresponds to screen A, LIMit 2 to screen B). It can be queried with the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>[:EVENt]? commands.
  • Page 752 R&S FSL WLAN TX Measurements (K91/K91n) – Status Reporting System STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC Register This register contains information about sync and bursts not found, and about pre–measurement results exceeding or falling short of expected values. The bits can be queried with commands "STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition?" and "STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]?".
  • Page 753 WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (K92/K93) – Status Reporting System R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (K92/K93) – Status Reporting System Additionally to the registers provided by the base system, the following registers are used or modified in the WiMAX IEEE 802.16 OFDM, OFDMA Measurements option (R&S FSL–K93): •...

  • Page 754: Status:questionable:limit Register

    R&S FSL WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (K92/K93) – Status Reporting System STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register This register comprises information about the observance of limit lines in the corresponding measurement window (LIMit 1 corresponds to screen A, LIMit 2 to screen B). It can be queried with the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>:CONDition? and STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>[:EVENt]? commands.

  • Page 755: Error Reporting

    WiMAX, WiBro Measurements (K92/K93) – Status Reporting System R&S FSL Bit No Meaning auto level NoSIGnal This bit is set if no signal is detected by the auto–level measurement. 7 to 14 These bits are not used. This bit is always 0. Error Reporting Error reporting for the WiMAX IEEE 802.16 OFDM, OFDMA Measurements option (R&S FSL–K92/K93) is carried out using the Service Request (SRQ) interrupt in the GPIB interface.
  • Page 756 R&S FSL Notation Contents of Chapter 6 Remote Control – Commands..............6.1 Notation .............................6.2 Remote Commands of the Base Unit .....................6.5 Common Commands........................6.6 ABORt Subsystem ........................6.10 CALCulate Subsystem......................6.11 CALibration Subsystem ......................6.120 DIAGnostic Subsystem......................6.122 DISPlay Subsystem ........................6.126 FORMat Subsytem .........................6.138 HCOPy Subsystem .........................6.139 INITiate Subsystem ........................6.146 INPut Subsystem ........................6.150 INSTrument Subsystem......................6.153...
  • Page 757 R&S FSL Notation CALibration Subsystem (Power Meter, K9)................6.380 FETCh Subsystem (Power Meter, K9) ...................6.381 READ Subsystem (Power Meter, K9)..................6.382 SENSe Subsystem (Power Meter, K9) ...................6.383 UNIT Subsystem (Power Meter, K9) ..................6.388 Remote Commands of the Spectrogram Measurement Option (K14) ........6.389 CALCulate Subsystem (SPECM, K14) ...................6.390 INITiate Subsystem (SPECM, K14)..................6.407 MMEMory Subsystem (SPECM, K14) ..................6.408...
  • Page 758 R&S FSL Notation INPut Subsystem (WCDMA, K72) ..................6.580 INSTrument Subsystem (WCDMA, K72)................6.581 SENSe Subsystem (WCDMA, K72) ..................6.582 STATus:QUEStionable Subsystem (WCDMA, K72) ..............6.591 TRACe Subsystem (WCDMA, K72) ..................6.592 TRIGger Subsystem (WCDMA, K72) ..................6.595 Remote Commands of the CDMA2000 BTS Analyzer Option (K82) ........6.596 CALCulate Subsystem (CDMA, K82) ..................6.597 CONFigure Subsystem (CDMA, K82) ..................6.604 DISPlay Subsystem (CDMA, K82) ..................6.611...
  • Page 759 R&S FSL Notation FETCh Subsystem (WiMAX, K92/K93) ..................6.816 FORMat Subsystem (WiMAX, K92/K93) ................6.828 INITiate Subsystem (WiMAX, K92/K93) .................6.829 INPut Subsystem (WiMAX, K92/K93)..................6.830 INSTrument Subsystem (WiMAX, K92/K93) ................6.831 MMEMory Subsystem (WiMAX, K92/K93) ................6.832 SENSe Subsystem (WiMAX, K92/K93)..................6.834 STATus Subsystem (WiMAX, K92/K93).................6.851 SYSTEM Subsystem (WiMAX, K92/K93)................6.855 TRACe Subsystem (WiMAX, K92/K93)..................6.856 TRIGger Subsystem (WiMAX, K92/K93) ................6.864...
  • Page 760 R&S FSL Notation Remote Control – Commands This chapter describes all remote control commands for the analyzer functions, firmware options (see list below) and the basic settings functions of the R&S FSL in detail. Commands that are used both for analyzer functions and firmware options are described in the analyzer commands section.

  • Page 761: Notation

    R&S FSL Notation Notation In the following sections, all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed and then described in detail, arranged according to the command subsystems. The notation is adapted to the SCPI standard. The SCPI conformity information is included in the individual description of the commands.
  • Page 762 R&S FSL Notation Special Characters A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands. These keywords are indicated in the same line; they are separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these keywords needs to be included in the header of the command. The effect of the command is independent of which of the keywords is used.
  • Page 763 R&S FSL Notation These keywords mark parameters which may be entered as numeric values or be set using specific keywords (character data). The following keywords given below are permitted: MAXimum: This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value. MINimum: This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible value.

  • Page 764: Remote Commands Of The Base Unit

    R&S FSL Remote Commands of the Base Unit Remote Commands of the Base Unit In this section all remote control commands for base unit functions are described in detail. Subsystems of the analyzer – "Common Commands" on page 6.6 – "ABORt Subsystem"...

  • Page 765: Common Commands

    Common Commands R&S FSL Common Commands The common commands are taken from the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. A particular command has the same effect on different devices. The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk "*" followed by three letters. Many common commands refer to the status reporting system which is described in detail in chapter 5 "Remote Control - Basics".
  • Page 766 R&S FSL Common Commands *ESR? STANDARD EVENT STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form (0 to 255) and subsequently sets the register to zero. Parameter 0 to 255 *IDN? IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the instrument identification. Return values (examples) LEGacy format, example for R&S FSL6: Rohde&Schwarz,FSL-6,100005/016,1.80...
  • Page 767 Common Commands R&S FSL *PCB PASS CONTROL BACK indicates the controller address which the remote control is to be returned to after termination of the triggered action. Parameter 0 to 30 *PRE PARALLEL POLL REGISTER ENABLE sets the parallel poll enable register to the indicated value.
  • Page 768 R&S FSL Common Commands *TRG TRIGGER initiates all actions in the currently active test screen expecting a trigger event. This command corresponds to the INITiate:IMMediate command. For details refer to section "Remote Commands of the Base Unit", "TRIGger Subsystem". *TST? SELF TEST QUERY initiates the self test of the instrument and outputs an error code in decimal form.

  • Page 769: Abort Subsystem

    ABORt Subsystem R&S FSL ABORt Subsystem The ABORt subsystem contains the commands for aborting triggered actions. An action can be triggered again immediately after being aborted. All commands trigger events, and therefore they have no *RST value. Commands of the ABORt Subsystem –...

  • Page 770: Calculate Subsystem

    R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate Subsystem The CALCulate subsystem contains commands for converting instrument data, transforming and carrying out corrections. These functions are carried out subsequent to data acquisition, i.e. following the SENSe subsystem. The following subsystems are included: • "CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem"...
  • Page 771 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem The CALCulate:DELTamarker subsystem controls the delta marker functions of the instrument. Commands of the CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>[:STATe] – CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:AOFF – CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] – CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK] – CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X – CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y – CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet – CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] – CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult? –...
  • Page 772 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem Characteristics RST value: OFF SCPI: device–specific Mode CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:AOFF This command switches off all active delta markers. For CDMA2000 and 1xEV-DO code domain measurements (option K82 and K84) the numeric suffix <1|2> selects the measurement screen. In the other modes the numeric suffix <1|2> is irrelevant.
  • Page 773 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK] This command sets the reference point level for all delta markers for a measurement with fixed reference point (CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe]) to the peak of the selected trace. For phase–noise measurements (CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe]), the command defines a new reference point level for delta marker 2. The numeric suffixes <1|2>...
  • Page 774 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y This command defines a new reference point level for all delta markers for a measurement with fixed reference point (CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe]). For phase–noise measurements (CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe]), the command defines a new reference point level for delta marker 2. The numeric suffixes <1|2>...
  • Page 775 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] This command switches on or off the phase–noise measurement with all active delta markers. The correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in the measurement. Marker 1 will be activated, if necessary, and a peak search will be performed. If marker 1 is activated, its position becomes the reference point for the measurement.
  • Page 776 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MAXimum[:PEAK] This command positions the delta marker to the current maximum value on the measured curve. If necessary, the corresponding delta marker will be activated first. For CDMA2000 and 1xEV-DO code domain measurements (option K82 and K84) the numeric suffix <1|2>...
  • Page 777 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL Characteristics RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode A, ADEMOD, CATV, CDMA, EVDO, SPECM, WCDMA CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MAXimum:RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the current value (i.e. ascending X values). The corresponding delta marker is activated first, if necessary.
  • Page 778 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MINimum:LEFT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher minimum value to the left of the current value (i.e. descending X values). The corresponding delta marker will be activated first, if necessary. For CDMA2000 and 1xEV-DO code domain measurements (option K82 and K84) the numeric suffix <1|2>...
  • Page 779 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL Characteristics RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode A, ADEMOD, CATV, CDMA, EVDO, SPECM, WCDMA CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MODE This command switches between relative and absolute frequency input of the delta marker (or time with span = 0). The numeric suffixes <1|2> are irrelevant for this command. Parameter ABSolute | RELative Example...
  • Page 780 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:X This command positions the selected delta marker to the indicated frequency (span > 0), time (span = 0) or level (APD measurement = ON or CCDF measurement = ON). The input is in absolute values or relative to marker 1 depending on the command CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MODE.
  • Page 781 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:Y? This command queries the measured value of the selected delta marker. The corresponding delta marker will be activated, if necessary. The output is always a relative value referred to marker 1 or to the reference position (reference fixed active). To obtain a correct query result, a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must be performed between the activation of the delta marker and the query of the y value.
  • Page 782 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate:DLINe Subsystem The CALCulate:DLINe subsystem defines the position of the display lines. Commands of the CALCulate:DLINe Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2> – CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2>:STATe CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2> This command defines the position of display line 1 or 2. These lines enable the user to mark any levels in the diagram.
  • Page 783 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate:ESPectrum Subsystem The CALCulate:ESPectrum subsystem contains the remote commands for Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurements. Both groups of commands (PSEarch and PEAKsearch) perform the same functions. Commands of the CALCulate:ESPectrum Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:AUTO – CALCulate<1|2>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:MARGin – CALCulate<1|2>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:PSHow CALCulate<1|2>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:AUTO This command activates or deactivates the list evaluation.
  • Page 784 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:PSHow This command marks all peaks with blue squares in the diagram. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. This command is available from firmware version 1.80. Parameter ON | OFF Example CALC:ESP:PSE:PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares. Characteristics RST value: OFF SCPI: device–specific...
  • Page 785 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate:FLINe Subsystem The CALCulate:FLINe subsystem defines the position of the frequency lines. Commands of the CALCulate:FLINe Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2> – CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2>:STATe CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2> This command defines the position of the frequency lines that mark the frequencies. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are irrelevant for this command. Parameter 0 to f Example...
  • Page 786 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem The CALCulate:LIMit subsystem contains commands for the limit lines and the corresponding limit checks. Limit lines can be defined as upper or lower limit lines. The individual Y values of the limit lines correspond to the values of the x–axis (CONTrol). The number of X and Y values must be identical. For details on limit lines refer to chapter "Instrument Functions", section "Using Limit Lines and Display Lines –...
  • Page 787 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL Definition of the limit line 1. Defining the name: CALC:LIM5:NAME 'TEST1' 2. Entering the comment: CALC:LIM5:COMM 'Upper limit line' 3. Associated trace: CALC:LIM5:TRAC 2 4. Defining the x–axis range: CALC:LIM5:CONT:DOM FREQ 5. Defining the x–axis scaling: CALC:LIM5:CONT:MODE ABS 6.
  • Page 788 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACTive? This command queries the names of all active limit lines. The numeric suffixes <1|2> and <1...8> are irrelevant for this command. This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value. This command is available from firmware version 1.60. Example CALC:LIM:ACT? Queries the names of all active limit lines.
  • Page 789 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL Characteristics *RST value: blank comment SCPI: device–specific Mode A, ADEMOD, CDMA, EVDO, NF CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:COPY This command copies one limit line onto another one The numeric suffixes <1|2> are irrelevant for this command. This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query. This command is available from firmware version 1.10.
  • Page 790 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:FAIL? This command queries the result of the limit check of the indicated limit line. It should be noted that a complete sweep must have been performed to obtain a correct result. A synchronization with *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI should therefore be provided. The result of the limit check is given with 0 for PASS, 1 for FAIL, and 2 for MARGIN.
  • Page 791 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL Example CALC:LIM:STAT ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 1. Characteristics *RST value: OFF SCPI: conform Mode A, BT, ADEMOD, CDMA, EVDO, NF CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:TRACe This command assigns a limit line to a trace. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are irrelevant for this command. This command is available from firmware version 1.10.
  • Page 792 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower Subsystem The CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower subsystem defines the limit check for adjacent channel power measurement. Commands of the CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower[:STATe] – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative] – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult? – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1...11>[:RELative] – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1...11>[:RELative]:STATe – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1...11>:ABSolute –...
  • Page 793 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL The numeric suffixes <1|2> and <1...8> are irrelevant for this command. Parameter first value: 0 to 100dB; limit for the upper (lower) adjacent channel second value: 0 to 100dB; is ignored but must be indicated for reasons of compatibility with the FSP family Example CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB, 30DB...
  • Page 794 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower/upper adjacent channel during adjacent–channel power measurement (Adjacent Channel Power). It should be noted that the absolute limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative].
  • Page 795 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL INIT;*WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end. CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES? Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels. Characteristics *RST value: OFF SCPI: device–specific Mode A, CDMA, EVDO CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult? This command queries the result of the limit check for the upper /lower adjacent channel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed.
  • Page 796 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1...11>[:RELative] This command defines the limit for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent channel power measurements. The reference value for the relative limit value is the measured channel power. The numeric suffix after ALTernate denotes the alternate channel. The numeric suffixes <1|2> with CALCulate and <1...8>...
  • Page 797 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel. CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS:STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel.
  • Page 798 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1...11>:ABSolute:STATe This command activates the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent– channel power measurement (Adjacent Channel Power). Before the command, the limit check must be globally switched on for the channel/adjacent– channel power with the command.
  • Page 799 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1...11>:RESult? This command queries the result of the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent channel power measurements. The numeric suffix after ALTernate denotes the alternate channel. The numeric suffixes <1|2> with CALCulate and <1...8> with LIMit are irrelevant for this command. If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is switched off, the command produces a query error.
  • Page 800 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol Subsystem The CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol subsystem defines the x–axis (CONTrol axis). This subsystem is available from firmware version 1.10. Commands of the CALCulate:LIMit:CONTrol Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol[:DATA] – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:DOMain – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:MODE – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:OFFSet – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:SHIFt – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:SPACing CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol[:DATA] This command defines the x–axis values (frequencies or times) of the upper or lower limit lines.
  • Page 801 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL Example CALC:LIM2:CONT:DOM TIME Defines zero span for the x–axis of limit line 2. Characteristics *RST value: FREQuency SCPI: device–specific Mode A, ADEMOD, CDMA, EVDO CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:MODE This command selects the relative or absolute scaling for the x–axis of the selected limit line. The numeric suffixes <1|2>...
  • Page 802 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:SHIFt This command moves a limit line by the indicated value in x direction. In contrast to CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:OFFSet, the line is shifted by modifying the individual x values and not by means of an additive offset. In analyzer mode, the unit of values depends on the span setting of the x–axis.
  • Page 803 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate:LIMit:ESPectrum Subsystem The CALCulate:LIMit:ESPectrum subsystem defines the power classes used in Spectrum Emission Mask measurements. This subsystem is available from firmware version 1.90. Commands of the CALCulate:LIMit:ESPectrum subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1…8>:ESPectrum:PCLass<1…4>[:EXCLusive] – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1…8>:ESPectrum:PCLass<1…4>:MINimum – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1…8>:ESPectrum:PCLass<1…4>:MAXimum – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1…8>:ESPectrum:PCLass<1…4>:COUNt –...
  • Page 804 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1…8>:ESPectrum:PCLass<1…4>:MAXimum This command sets the upper limit level for one power class. The unit is dBm. The limit always ends at + 200 dBm, i.e. the upper limit of the last power class can not be set. If more than one power class is in use, the upper limit must equal the lower limit of the next power class.
  • Page 805 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL Example CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:COUN ABS Characteristics: *RST value: – SCPI: conform Mode A, CDMA CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1…8>:ESPectrum:LIMits This command sets the limits for all power classes you want to use. The limit defined by the string always starts at -200 dBm and always ends at 200 dBm. Between these up to three limits can be defined.
  • Page 806 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer Subsystem The CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer subsystem defines the lower limit line. This subsystem is available from firmware version 1.10. Commands of the CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer[:DATA] – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:STATe – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:OFFSet – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:MARGin – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:MODE – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:SHIFt – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:SPACing –...
  • Page 807 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:STATe This command switches on or off the indicated limit line. The limit check is activated separately with CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:STATe. In spectrum analyzer mode, the result of the limit check can be queried with CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:FAIL?. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are irrelevant for this command. This command is available from firmware version 1.10.
  • Page 808 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:MARGin This command defines a margin to a lower limit line, at which out–of–limit values are signaled (if the limit check is active), but not handled as a violation of the limit value. Only the unit dB is available in spectrum analyzer mode. The numeric suffixes <1|2>...
  • Page 809 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL Example CALC:LIM3:LOW:SHIF 20DB Shifts all Y values of limit line 3 by 20 dB. Characteristics *RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode A, ADEMOD, CDMA, EVDO, NF CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:SPACing This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the lower limit line. The numeric suffixes <1|2>...
  • Page 810 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer Subsystem The CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer subsystem defines the upper limit line. This subsystem is available from firmware version 1.10. Commands of the CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer[:DATA] – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:MARGin – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:MODE – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:OFFSet – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:SHIFt – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:SPACing – CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:STATe –...
  • Page 811 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:MARGin This command defines a margin to an upper limit line, at which out–of–limit values are signaled (if the limit check is active), but not handled as a violation of the limit value. Only the unit dB is available in spectrum analyzer mode. The numeric suffixes <1|2>...
  • Page 812 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem Parameter <numeric_value> Example CALC:LIM2:UPP:OFFS 3dB Shifts limit line 2 by 3 dB upwards. Characteristics *RST value: 0 SCPI: device–specific Mode A, ADEMOD, CDMA, EVDO CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:SHIFt This command moves a limit line by the indicated value in Y direction. In contrast to CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:OFFSet, the line is shifted by modifying the individual Y values and not by means of an additive offset.
  • Page 813 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:STATe This command switches on or off the indicated limit line. The limit check is activated separately with CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:STATe. In spectrum analyzer mode, the result of the limit check can be queried with CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:FAIL?. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are irrelevant for this command. This command is available from firmware version 1.10.
  • Page 814 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem The CALCulate:MARKer subsystem checks the marker functions of the instrument. The following subsystem is included: • "CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion Subsystem" on page 6.68 Commands of the CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>[:STATe] – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:AOFF – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:COUNt – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:COUNt:FREQuency? –...
  • Page 815 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>[:STATe] This command switches on or off the currently selected marker. If no indication is made, marker 1 is selected automatically. If marker 2, 3 or 4 is selected and used as a delta marker, it is switched to marker mode.
  • Page 816 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem Parameter ON | OFF Example INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK ON Switches on marker 1. CALC:MARK:COUN ON Switches on the frequency counter for marker 1. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK:COUN:FREQ? Outputs the measured value.
  • Page 817 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:COUNt:RESolution This command specifies the resolution of the frequency counter. The numeric suffixes <1|2> and <1...4> are irrelevant for this command. Parameter 0.1 | 1 | 10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000 Hz Example CALC:MARK:COUN:RES 1kHz Sets the resolution of the frequency counter to 1 kHz.
  • Page 818 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem Characteristics *RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode A, ADEMOD, CATV, CDMA, EVDO, SPECM, WCDMA CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MAXimum:AUTO Activates the automatic peak search function for marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep. This function may be used during adjustments of a device under test to keep track of the actual peak marker position and level.
  • Page 819 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MAXimum:NEXT This command positions the marker to the next smaller maximum value of the corresponding trace. For CDMA2000 and 1xEV-DO code domain measurements (option K82 and K84) the numeric suffix <1|2> selects the measurement screen. In the other modes the numeric suffix <1|2> is irrelevant.
  • Page 820 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC:MARK2:MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace. Characteristics *RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode A, ADEMOD, CATV, CDMA, EVDO, SPECM, WCDMA CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MINimum:AUTO Activates the automatic minimum value search function for marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep.
  • Page 821 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL Characteristics *RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode A, ADEMOD, CATV, CDMA, EVDO, SPECM, WCDMA CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MINimum:NEXT This command positions the marker to the next higher minimum value of the corresponding trace. For CDMA2000 and 1xEV-DO code domain measurements (option K82 and K84) the numeric suffix <1|2>...
  • Page 822 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:PEXCursion This command defines the peak excursion, i.e. the spacing below a trace maximum which must be attained before a new maximum is recognized, or the spacing above a trace minimum which must be attained before a new minimum is recognized. The set value applies to all markers and delta markers.
  • Page 823 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:X This command positions the selected marker to the indicated frequency (span > 0), time (span = 0) or level (APD measurement or CCDF measurement ON). If marker 2, 3 or 4 is selected and used as delta marker, it is switched to marker mode. For CDMA2000 and 1xEV-DO code domain measurements (option K82 and K84) the numeric suffix <1|2>...
  • Page 824 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:X:SLIMits:LEFT This command sets the left limit of the search range for markers and delta markers. Depending on the span setting of the x–axis the indicated value defines a frequency (span > 0) or time (span = 0). The numeric suffixes <1|2>...
  • Page 825 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:X:SSIZe This command defines the step size of the rotary knob for marker or delta marker value changes. It takes only effect in manual operation. It is available for all base unit measurements with the exception of statistics. The numeric suffixes <1|2>...
  • Page 826 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:Y:PERCent This command positions the selected marker to the given probability. If marker 2, 3 or 4 is selected and used as a delta marker, it is switched to marker mode. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are irrelevant for this command. Note: The command is only available with the CCDF measurement switched on.
  • Page 827 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion Subsystem The CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion subsystem checks the marker functions in the instrument. The following subsystems are included: • "CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:HARMonics Subsystem" on page 6.82 • "CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer Subsystem" on page 6.86 • "CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack Subsystem" on page 6.93 • "CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary Subsystem"...
  • Page 828 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] This command switches on or off the audio demodulator when the indicated marker is reached. With span > 0 the hold time can be defined at the corresponding marker position with CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff. In zero span the demodulation is permanently active.
  • Page 829 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL Characteristics: *RST value: – (DEModulation is set to OFF) SCPI: device–specific Mode: CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect This command selects the demodulation type for the audio demodulator. The command is independent of the selected marker, the suffixes 1|2 and 1 to 4 are irrelevant. The numeric suffixes <1|2>...
  • Page 830 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:CSTep This command sets the step size of the center frequency to the X value of the current marker. If marker 2, 3 or 4 is selected and used as delta marker, it is switched to the marker mode. The numeric suffix <1|2>...
  • Page 831 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALC:MARK:FUNC:Y? Queries the level of maxima found CALC:MARK:FUNC:X? Queries the frequencies (span <> 0) or time (span = 0) of maxima found. Characteristics *RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt? This query reads out the number of maxima found during the search. If no search for maxima has been performed, 0 is returned.
  • Page 832 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:X? This query reads out the list of X values of the maxima found. The number of available values can be queried with CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?. With sort mode X, the X values are in increasing order; with sort mode Y the order corresponds to the decreasing order of the Y values.
  • Page 833 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL Characteristics *RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe] This command switches on the measurement of the AM modulation depth. An AM–modulated carrier is required on the screen for correct operation. If necessary, marker 1 is previously activated and set to the largest signal available.
  • Page 834 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem Example INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK:X 10MHZ Sets the reference marker (marker 1) to the carrier signal at 10 MHz. CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP ON Switches on the modulation depth measurement. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:RES? Outputs the measured value.
  • Page 835 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL Example CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD 3dB Sets the level spacing to 3 dB. Characteristics *RST value: 6dB SCPI: device–specific Mode CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency? This command queries the values of the two temporary markers for span>0. The frequency values are separated by comma and output in ascending order. A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the function and querying the measured value to obtain a correct query result.
  • Page 836 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem Characteristics RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult? This command queries the measured value. The value depends on the span setting: – span > 0: frequency spacing of the two temporary markers (in Hz) – span = 0: pulse width between the two temporary markers (in s) A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the function and querying the measured value in order to obtain a correct query result.
  • Page 837 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME? This command queries the values of the two temporary markers in zero span. The time values are separated by comma and output in ascending order. A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the function and querying the measured value to obtain a correct query result.
  • Page 838 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult? This command queries the result of the noise measurement. A complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must be performed between switching on the function and querying the measured value in order to obtain a correct query result. This is only possible in single sweep mode.
  • Page 839 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:TOI[:STATe] This command initiates the measurement of the third–order intercept point. A two–tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the RF input of the instrument. Marker 1 and marker 2 (both normal markers) are set to the maximum of the two signals. Delta marker 3 and delta marker 4 are positioned to the intermodulation products.
  • Page 840 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:TOI:SEARchsignal This command starts the search of the signals required for the third order intercept measurement. The numeric suffix <1|2> are irrelevant for this command. Note: No new measurement is done. Only the currently available trace selected for the TOI measurement is used Parameter ONCE...
  • Page 841 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:HARMonics Subsystem The CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWER subsystem contains the commands to define the settings for harmonics measurement. This subsystem is available from firmware version 1.10. Commands of the CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:HARMonics Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe] – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion? – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST? –...
  • Page 842 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:BAND:AUTO OFF Deactivates the automatic bandwidth enlargement. Characteristics RST value: ON SCPI: device–specific Mode A–F, A–T CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion? This command queries the distortion results (THD: total harmonic distortion). Two values separated by a comma are returned: <THD in %>, <THD in dB>. To obtain a correct result, a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must be performed before a query is output.
  • Page 843 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST? This command reads out the list of the harmonics. The first value is the absolute power of the first harmonic (the unit is set via the CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer command). The following values are relative to the carrier signal and have the unit dB. They are separated by commas and correspond to the harmonics to be measured (set via the command).
  • Page 844 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet This command optimizes the device settings depending on the span setting: span > 0 Frequency and level of the first harmonic are determined and used for the measurement list. zero span The level of the first harmonic is determined. The frequency remains unchanged.
  • Page 845 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer Subsystem The CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWER subsystem contains the commands for control of power measurement. Commands of the CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:MODe – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult:PHZ – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect Further information – "Predefined CP / ACP standards" on page 6.86 Predefined CP / ACP standards Parameter...
  • Page 846 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] This command switches off the power measurement. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value. Parameter Example CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW OFF Switches off the power measurement. Characteristics *RST value: –...
  • Page 847 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet This command selects the power measurement setting for a standard and previously switches on the corresponding measurement, if required. The configuration for a standard comprises of the parameters weighting filter, channel bandwidth and spacing, resolution and video bandwidth, as well as detector and sweep time. The numeric suffixes <1|2>...
  • Page 848 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem Parameter ACPower Adjacent–channel power measurement Results are output in the following sequence, separated by commas: Power of transmission channel Power of lower adjacent channel Power of upper adjacent channel Power of lower alternate channel 1 Power of upper alternate channel 1 Power of lower alternate channel 2 Power of upper alternate channel 2 The number of measured values returned depends on the number of...
  • Page 849 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL OBANdwidth | Measurement of occupied bandwidth OBWidth The occupied bandwidth in Hz is returned. PPOWer Power of the highest peak In a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement, the query returns the power result for the reference range, if this power reference type is selected. Example of channel/adjacent–channel power measurement POW:ACH:ACP 3 Sets the number of adjacent/alternate channels to 3.
  • Page 850 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem Example of occupied bandwidth measurement POW:BAND 90PCT Defines 90% as the percentage of the power to be contained in the bandwidth range to be measured. INIT:CONT OFF Switches over to single sweep mode. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end of the sweep. CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW Queries the occupied bandwidth measured.
  • Page 851 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect This command selects – and switches on – specified power measurement type. The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the "SENSe:POWer Subsystem" on page 6.220. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Note: If CPOWer is selected, the number of adjacent channels ([SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs) is set to 0.
  • Page 852 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack Subsystem The CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack subsystem defines the settings of the signal track. Commands of the CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth|BWIDth – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] This command switches the signal–track function on or off. With signal track activated, the maximum signal is determined after each frequency sweep and the center frequency is set to the frequency of this signal.
  • Page 853 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL Characteristics *RST value: – (= span/10 on activating the function) SCPI: device–specific Mode A–F CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold This command defines the threshold above which the largest signal is searched for. The response unit depends on the settings defined with CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer. The numeric suffixes <1|2>...
  • Page 854 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for controlling the power functions in zero span. Commands of the CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:MSUMmary? – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe] – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult? – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult? – CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult? –...
  • Page 855 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL Measurement Measurement Measurement Time Time Time Period Period Time offset of first pulse Trace start Parameter <time offset of first pulse>, <measurement time>, <period>, < # of pulses to measure> Example DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV –10dBm Sets the reference level to 10 dB INP:ATT 30 dB Sets the input attenuation to 30 dB FREQ:CENT 935.2MHz;SPAN 0Hz...
  • Page 856 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe] This command switches on or off the previously selected power measurements in zero span. Thus one or several measurements can be first selected and then switched on and off together with CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe]. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Parameter ON | OFF Example...
  • Page 857 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL AVER:COUN 200 Sets the measurement counter to 200. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. Characteristics *RST value: OFF SCPI: device–specific Mode A–T CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] This command switches on or off the measurement of the mean value. The numeric suffixes <1|2>...
  • Page 858 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:AVER:RES? Outputs the result. Characteristics *RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode A–T CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult? This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value with active peak hold. The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been switched on previously using CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
  • Page 859 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON Switches on the function. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:RES? Outputs the result. Characteristics *RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode A–T CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MODE This command selects absolute or relative power measurement in zero span. The reference power for relative measurement is defined with CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:REFerence:AUTO.
  • Page 860 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] This command switches on or off the measurement of the positive peak value. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Parameter ON | OFF Example CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON Switches on the function. Characteristics *RST value: OFF SCPI: device–specific Mode A–T...
  • Page 861 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult? This command is used to query the result of the measurement of the positive peak value with active peak hold function. The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd. A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the function and querying the measured value to obtain a correct query result.
  • Page 862 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem Characteristics *RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode A–T CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:REFerence:AUTO This command sets the currently measured average value (CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe]) and RMS value (CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe]) as reference values for relative measurements in zero span. If the measurement of RMS value and average is not activated, the reference value 0 dBm is used.
  • Page 863 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESult? This command queries the result of the measurement of the averaged RMS value. The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage. A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the function and querying the measured value to obtain a correct query result.
  • Page 864 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem Characteristics *RST– value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode A–T CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult? This command queries the result of the measurement of the RMS power value. A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the function and querying the measured value to obtain a correct query result.
  • Page 865 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:AVERage:RESult? This command queries the result of the averaged standard deviation determined in several sweeps. The query is possible only if averaging is active. A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the function and querying the measured value to obtain a correct query result.
  • Page 866 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem Characteristics *RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode A–T CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:RESult? This command queries the results of the standard deviation measurement. A complete sweep with synchronization to sweep end must be performed between switching on the function and querying the measured value to obtain a correct query result. This is only possible in single sweep mode.
  • Page 867 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate:MATH Subsystem The CALCulate:MATH subsystem allows to process data from the SENSe–subsystem in numeric expressions. Commands of the CALCulate:MATH Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:MATH[:EXPression][:DEFine] – CALCulate<1|2>:MATH:MODE – CALCulate<1|2>:MATH:POSition – CALCulate<1|2>:MATH:STATe CALCulate<1|2>:MATH[:EXPression][:DEFine] This command defines the mathematical expression for relating traces to trace1. This command is available from firmware version 1.30.
  • Page 868 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem Characteristics *RST value: LOG SCPI: device–specific Mode CALCulate<1|2>:MATH:POSition This command defines the position of the result of the trace mathematics. The indication is in % of the screen height, with 100% corresponding to the upper diagram border. This command is available from firmware version 1.30.
  • Page 869 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate:PSEarch|PEAKsearch Subsystem The CALCulate:PSEarch|PEAKsearch subsystem contains the remote commands for Spurious Emissions measurements. Both groups of commands (PSEarch and PEAKsearch) perform the same functions. Commands of the CALCulate:PSEarch|PEAKsearch Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:PSEarch|PEAKsearch[:IMMediate] – CALCulate<1|2>:PSEarch|PEAKsearch:AUTO – CALCulate<1|2>:PSEarch|PEAKsearch:MARGin – CALCulate<1|2>:PSEarch|PEAKsearch:PSHow –...
  • Page 870 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate<1|2>:PSEarch|PEAKsearch:SUBRanges This command sets the number of peaks per range that are stored in the list. Once the selected number of peaks has been reached, the peak search is stopped in the current range and continued in the next range. The numeric suffixes <1|2>...
  • Page 871 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate:STATistics Subsystem The CALCulate:STATistics subsystem controls the statistical measurement functions in the instrument. Commands of the CALCulate:STATistics Subsystem – CALCulate:STATistics:APD[:STATe] – CALCulate:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe] – CALCulate:STATistics:NSAMples – CALCulate:STATistics:PRESet – CALCulate:STATistics:RESult<1...6>? – CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO – CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe – CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel – CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer –...
  • Page 872 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem Characteristics *RST value: OFF SCPI: device–specific Mode A, CDMA, EVDO CALCulate:STATistics:NSAMples This command sets the number of measurement points to be acquired for the statistical measurement functions. Parameter 100 to 1E9 Example CALC:STAT:NSAM 500 Sets the number of measurement points to be acquired to 500. Characteristics *RST value: 100000 SCPI: device–specific...
  • Page 873 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate:STATistics:RESult<1...6>? This command reads out the results of statistical measurements of a recorded trace. The trace is selected with the numeric suffix <1...6> attached to RESult. Parameter The required result is selected via the following parameters: MEAN Average (=RMS) power in dBm measured during the measurement time.
  • Page 874 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe This command defines the level range for the x–axis of the measurement diagram. The setting is identical to the level range setting defined with the DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...6>:Y[:SCALe] command. Parameter 10dB to 200dB Example CALC:STAT:SCAL:X:RANG 20dB Characteristics *RST value: 100dB SCPI: device–specific Mode...
  • Page 875 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT This command defines the scaling type of the y–axis. This command is available from firmware version 1.80. Parameter PCT | ABS Example CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:UNIT PCT Sets the percentage scale. Characteristics RST value: ABS SCPI: device–specific Mode A, EVDO CALCulate:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer This command defines the upper limit for the y–axis of the diagram in statistical measurements.
  • Page 876 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate:THReshold Subsystem The CALCulate:THReshold subsystem controls the threshold value for the maximum/minimum search of markers. Commands of the CALCulate:THReshold Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold – CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold:STATe CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold This command defines the threshold value for the maximum/minimum search of markers with marker search functions.
  • Page 877 CALCulate Subsystem R&S FSL CALCulate:TLINe Subsystem The CALCulate:TLINe subsystem defines the position of the time lines. Commands of the CALCulate:TLINe Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2> – CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2>:STATe CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2> This command defines the position of the time lines that mark the times. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Parameter 0 to 1000s Example...
  • Page 878 R&S FSL CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate:UNIT Subsystem The CALCulate:UNIT subsystem defines the units for the parameters that can be set and the measurement results. Commands of the CALCulate:UNIT Subsystem – CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer This command selects the unit for power. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Parameter DBM | V | A | W | DBPW | WATT | DBPT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMPere Example...

  • Page 879: Calibration Subsystem

    CALibration Subsystem R&S FSL CALibration Subsystem The commands of the CALibration subsystem determine the data for system error correction in the instrument. Commands of the CALibration Subsystem – CALibration[:ALL]? – CALibration:ABORt – CALibration:RESult? – CALibration:STATe CALibration[:ALL]? This command initiates the acquisition of system error correction data. A "0" is returned if the acquisition was successful.
  • Page 880 R&S FSL CALibration Subsystem CALibration:ABORt This command has no effect, but is implemented to provide compatibility with the FSP family. The collection of self alignment data can only be aborted via manual operation. For details refer to chapter 4 "Instrument Functions - Basic Settings", section "Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key"...

  • Page 881: Diagnostic Subsystem

    DIAGnostic Subsystem R&S FSL DIAGnostic Subsystem The DIAGnostic subsystem contains the commands which support instrument diagnostics for maintenance, service and repair. In accordance with the SCPI standard, all of these commands are device-specific. Commands of the DIAGnostic Subsystem – DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:BIOSinfo? –...
  • Page 882 R&S FSL DIAGnostic Subsystem Example DIAG:SERV:HWIN? Queries the hardware information. "FRONTEND|100001/003|1300.3009|03|01|00|00", "MOTHERBOARD|123456/002|1300.3080|02|00|00|00", Characteristics *RST value: - SCPI: device-specific Mode DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] This command toggles between the RF input on the front panel and the internal 65.83 MHz reference signal. Parameter CALibration | RF | TG Example DIAG:SERV:INP CAL Characteristics...
  • Page 883 DIAGnostic Subsystem R&S FSL DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:PRATe This command sets the comb generator frequency. This command only takes effect, if the internal reference signal is selected for calibration (DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:INPut[:SELect]). Parameter COMB1 65.8333 MHz / 1 COMB64 65.8333 MHz / 64 COMB65 65.8333 MHz / 65 Example DIAG:SERV:INP:PULS:PRAT COMB64 Sets the comb generator frequency to...
  • Page 884 R&S FSL DIAGnostic Subsystem DIAGnostic<1|2>:SERVice:SFUNction This command activates a service function which can be selected by indicating the five parameters: function group number, board number, function number, parameter 1 and parameter 2 (see service manual). The contents of the parameter string are identical to the code to be entered in the edit dialog box of manual operation.

  • Page 885: Display Subsystem

    DISPlay Subsystem R&S FSL DISPlay Subsystem The DISPLay subsystem controls the selection and presentation of textual and graphic information as well as of measurement data on the display. Commands of the DISPlay Subsystem – DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency – DISPlay:CMAP<1...26>:DEFault<1|2> – DISPlay:CMAP<1...26>:HSL – DISPlay:CMAP<1...26>:PDEFined –...
  • Page 886 R&S FSL DISPlay Subsystem CMAP suffix assignment Each numeric suffix of CMAP is assigned one or several graphical elements which can be modified by varying the corresponding color setting. The following assignment applies: Suffix Description CMAP1 Background CMAP2 Grid CMAP3 Common Text CMAP4 Check Status OK...
  • Page 887 DISPlay Subsystem R&S FSL DISPlay:CMAP<1...26>:DEFault<1|2> This command resets the screen colors of all display items to their default settings. Two default settings DEFault1 and DEFault2 are available. The numeric suffix of CMAP is irrelevant. This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value. This command is available from firmware version 1.10.
  • Page 888 R&S FSL DISPlay Subsystem Example DISP:CMAP2:PDEF GRE Characteristics *RST value: - SCPI: conform Mode DISPlay:FORMat This command has no effect but is implemented for reasons of compatibility with the FSP family. It switches the measurement result display between FULL SCREEN and SPLIT SCREEN. This command is available from firmware version 1.10.
  • Page 889 DISPlay Subsystem R&S FSL DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] This command switches on or off the power-save mode of the display. With the power-save mode activated the display including backlight is completely switched off after the elapse of the response time (see command). DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff Note: This mode is recommended for preserving the display especially if the instrument is exclusively operated via remote control.
  • Page 890 R&S FSL DISPlay Subsystem Example DISP:SIZE LARG Displays the measurement diagram in full screen size. DISP:WIND2:SIZE LARG Displays the list in full screen size. Characteristics *RST value: SMALl SCPI: device–specific Mode A, ADEMOD DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT[:DATA] This command defines a comment (max. 20 characters) which can be displayed on the screen. This command is available from firmware version 1.10.
  • Page 891 DISPlay Subsystem R&S FSL DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TIME This command switches on or off the screen display of date and time. The numeric suffix in WINDow<1| 2> is irrelevant. This command is available from firmware version 1.10. Parameter ON | OFF Example DISP:TIME ON Characteristics *RST value: OFF SCPI: device-specific...
  • Page 892 R&S FSL DISPlay Subsystem Example SWE:CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode. SWE:COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16. DISP:TRAC3:MODE MAXH Switches on the calculation of the for trace 3. INIT;*WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps. Characteristics *RST value: WRITe for TRACe1, STATe OFF for TRACe2/3/4/5/6 SCPI: device–specific...
  • Page 893 DISPlay Subsystem R&S FSL Characteristics *RST value: LOG SCPI: conform Mode DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...6>:Y:SPACing This command selects the scaling for the level display range. The numeric suffixes <1|2> and <1...6> are irrelevant. Parameter LOGarithmic Selects logarithmic scaling. LINear Selects linear scaling in %. Selects linear scaling in dB.
  • Page 894 R&S FSL DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...6>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE This command defines the scale type of the y–axis (absolute or relative). When SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate is set to OFF, this command has no immediate effect on the screen. The numeric suffixes <1|2> and <1...6> are irrelevant. Parameter ABSolute | RELative Example...
  • Page 895 DISPlay Subsystem R&S FSL Characteristics *RST value: 0dB SCPI: conform Mode A, CATV, CDMA, EVDO, PSM, WCDMA, WLAN DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...6>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition (models with tracking generator) This command requires a tracking generator and active normalization in the Tracking Generator mode. It defines the position of the reference value. The numeric suffixes <1|2>...
  • Page 896 R&S FSL DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...6>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue:AUTO This command defines whether the reference value for the y–axis is coupled to the reference level (default) or not. The numeric suffixes <1|2> and <1...6> are irrelevant. Parameter ON | OFF Example DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL:AUTO ON Characteristics *RST value: ON SCPI: device–specific Mode...

  • Page 897: Format Subsytem

    FORMat Subsytem R&S FSL FORMat Subsytem The FORMat subsystem specifies the data format of the data transmitted from and to the instrument. Commands of the FORMat Subsystem – FORMat[:DATA] – FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator FORMat[:DATA] This command specifies the data format for the data transmitted from the instrument to the control PC.

  • Page 898: Hcopy Subsystem

    R&S FSL HCOPy Subsystem HCOPy Subsystem The HCOPy subsystem controls the output of display information for documentation purposes on output devices or files. The instrument allows two independent printer configurations which can be set separately with the numeric suffix <1|2>. Commands of the HCOPy Subsystem –...
  • Page 899 HCOPy Subsystem R&S FSL HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]:NEXT This command starts a hardcopy output. The numeric suffix selects which printer configuration (device 1 or 2) is to be used for the hardcopy output. If there is no suffix, configuration 1 is automatically selected. If the output is printed to a file (see HCOPy:DESTination<1|2>...
  • Page 900 R&S FSL HCOPy Subsystem HCOPy:CMAP<1...26>:DEFault This command sets the colors for a printout or hardcopy. The numeric suffix in CMAP is not significant. This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value. This command is available from firmware version 1.10. Parameter current screen colors with the background in white and the grid in black.
  • Page 901 HCOPy Subsystem R&S FSL HCOPy:CMAP<1...26>:PDEFined This command defines the color table in user defined colors using predefined color values. To each numeric suffix of CMAP is assigned one or several picture elements which can be modified by varying the corresponding color setting. For details on the CMAP assignment refer to "CMAP suffix assignment"...
  • Page 902 R&S FSL HCOPy Subsystem Characteristics *RST value: SYST:COMM:CLIP SCPI: conform Mode HCOPy:DEVice:COLor This command selects between color and monochrome hardcopy of the screen. This command is available from firmware version 1.10. Parameter ON | OFF Example HCOP:DEV:COL ON Characteristics *RST value: OFF SCPI: conform Mode HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2>...
  • Page 903 HCOPy Subsystem R&S FSL Characteristics *RST value: - SCPI: conform Mode HCOPy:ITEM:ALL This command selects the complete screen to be output. The hardcopy output is always provided with comments, title, time and date. As an alternative to the whole screen, e.g. only traces (HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:STATe command) can be output.
  • Page 904 R&S FSL HCOPy Subsystem Example HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TRACe:STAT ON Characteristics *RST value: OFF SCPI: device-specific Mode HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2> The command selects the format of the output (portrait and landscape) (hardcopy unit 1 or 2). Note: The command is only available provided that the output device "printer" (HCOPy:DESTination<1|2>) has been selected.

  • Page 905: Initiate Subsystem

    INITiate Subsystem R&S FSL INITiate Subsystem The INITiate subsystem is used to control the init–measurement function. Commands of the INITiate Subsystem – INITiate<1|2>[:IMMediate] – INITiate<1|2>:CONMeas – INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous – INITiate<1|2>:DISPlay – INITiate<1|2>:ESPectrum – INITiate<1|2>:SPURious INITiate<1|2>[:IMMediate] The command initiates a new measurement sequence. With sweep count >...
  • Page 906 R&S FSL INITiate Subsystem INITiate<1|2>:CONMeas This command continues a stopped measurement at the current position in single sweep mode. The function is useful especially for trace functions MAXHold, MINHold and AVERage, if the previous results are not to be cleared with sweep count > 0 or average count > 0 on restarting the measurement (INIT:IMMediate resets the previous results on restarting the measurement).
  • Page 907 INITiate Subsystem R&S FSL INITiate<1|2>:DISPlay This command switches the display during a single sweep measurement on (ON) or off (OFF). The numeric suffixes <1|2> are irrelevant for this command. Parameter ON | OFF Example INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT:DISP OFF Sets the display behavior to OFF INIT;*WAI...
  • Page 908 R&S FSL INITiate Subsystem INITiate<1|2>:SPURious This command starts a Spurious Emissions measurement. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query. This command is available from firmware version 1.80. Example INIT:SPUR Starts a Spurious Emissions measurement.

  • Page 909: Input Subsystem

    INPut Subsystem R&S FSL INPut Subsystem The INPut subsystem controls the input characteristics of the RF inputs of the instrument. Commands of the INPut Subsystem – INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation – INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO – INPut<1|2>:GAIN:STATe (option RF Preamplifier, B22) – INPut<1|2>:IMPedance – INPut<1|2>:UPORt[:VALue]? – INPut<1|2>:UPORt:STATe INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation This command programs the input attenuator.
  • Page 910 R&S FSL INPut Subsystem INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO This command automatically couples the input attenuation to the reference level (state ON) or switches the input attenuation to manual entry (state OFF). Parameter ON | OFF Example INP:ATT:AUTO ON Couples the attenuation set on the attenuator to the reference level. Characteristics *RST value: ON SCPI: conform...
  • Page 911 INPut Subsystem R&S FSL Characteristics *RST value: 50 SCPI: conform Mode INPut<1|2>:UPORt[:VALue]? This command queries the control lines of the user ports. This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value. Example INP:UPOR? Characteristics RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode INPut<1|2>:UPORt:STATe This command toggles the control lines of the user ports between INPut and OUTPut.

  • Page 912: Instrument Subsystem

    R&S FSL INSTrument Subsystem INSTrument Subsystem The INSTrument subsystem selects the operating mode of the unit either via text parameters or fixed numbers. Commands of the INSTrument Subsystem – INSTrument[:SELect] – INSTrument:NSELect INSTrument[:SELect] This command switches between the measurement modes by means of text parameters. Parameter SANalyzer spectrum analyzer...

  • Page 913: Mmemory Subsystem

    MMEMory Subsystem R&S FSL MMEMory Subsystem The MMEMory (mass memory) subsystem provides commands which allow for access to the storage media of the instrument and for storing and loading various instrument settings. The various drives can be addressed via the "mass storage unit specifier" <msus> using the conven- tional DOS syntax.
  • Page 914 R&S FSL MMEMory Subsystem – MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings – MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL – MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE – MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SCData (models with tracking generator) – MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive] – MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL – MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:LIST – MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:PEAK – MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe – MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe:NEXT – MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:TRACe MMEMory:CATalog? This command reads the indicated directory. According to DOS convention, wild card characters can be entered in order to query e.g.
  • Page 915 MMEMory Subsystem R&S FSL MMEMory:CDIRectory This command changes the current directory. Parameter <directory_name> = DOS path name In addition to the path name, the indication of the directory may contain the drive name. The path name complies with the DOS conventions. Example MMEM:CDIR 'C:\R_S\Instr\user' Selects the directory C:\R_S\Instr\user.
  • Page 916 R&S FSL MMEMory Subsystem Characteristics *RST value: - SCPI: device-specific Mode MMEMory:COMMent This command defines a comment (max. 60 characters) for a device setting to be stored. Example MMEM:COMM ’Setup for FM measurement’ Characteristics *RST value: blank comment SCPI: device-specific Mode MMEMory:COPY This command copies the files indicated in <file_source>...
  • Page 917 MMEMory Subsystem R&S FSL Parameter <file_name>[,<block>] <file_name> selects the file to be transferred <block> binary data block with the following structure: • character '#' • digit for the length of the length information • indicated number of digits as length information (number of bytes) for the binary data themselves •...
  • Page 918 R&S FSL MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO This command defines which settings file is automatically loaded after the device is switched on. The contents of the file are read after switching on the device and used to define the new device state. The settings file defined as auto recall set can also be restored by the command.
  • Page 919 MMEMory Subsystem R&S FSL MMEMory:MDIRectory This command creates a new directory. The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive name. The path name complies with DOS conventions. This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query. Parameter <directory_name>...
  • Page 920 R&S FSL MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory:MSIS This command changes to the drive indicated. The drive may be the internal hard disk C:. Parameter <device> = A: | C: ... Z: The path name complies with DOS conventions. Example MMEM:MSIS 'C:' Characteristics *RST value: "C: SCPI: conform Mode...
  • Page 921 MMEMory Subsystem R&S FSL Example MMEM:NETW:MAP 'T:','\\server\folder' Maps drive T: to folder on server. Characteristics RST value: - SCPI: device-specific Mode MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect This command disconnects the selected drive. This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query. This command is available from firmware version 1.70.
  • Page 922 R&S FSL MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives? This command lists all mapped network drives. This command is available from firmware version 1.70. Parameter Lists all mapped network drives including the folder information. Lists all mapped network drive names. Example MMEM:NETW:USED ON Lists all mapped network drives including the folder information. Characteristics RST value: OFF SCPI: device-specific...
  • Page 923 MMEMory Subsystem R&S FSL MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:FINal This command includes the final measurement data in the list of partial datasets of a device setting to be stored/loaded. Parameter ON | OFF Example "MMEM:SEL:FIN ON" inserts the final measurement data in the list of partial data sets Characteristics: *RST value: ON SCPI: device-specific...
  • Page 924 R&S FSL MMEMory Subsystem Example MMEM:SEL:HWS ON Characteristics *RST value: ON SCPI: device-specific Mode MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL This command includes all limit lines (activated and de-activated) in the settings file to be stored/loaded. This command is available from firmware version 1.10. Parameter ON | OFF Example MMEM:SEL:LIN:ALL ON...
  • Page 925 MMEMory Subsystem R&S FSL Characteristics *RST value: OFF SCPI: device-specific Mode MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive] This command includes the active traces in the settings file to be stored/loaded. Active traces are all traces whose state is not blank. Parameter ON | OFF Example MMEM:SEL:TRAC ON Characteristics *RST value: OFF, i.e.
  • Page 926 R&S FSL MMEMory Subsystem Characteristics RST value: - SCPI: device-specific Mode MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:PEAK This command stores the current marker peak list in a *.dat file. The file consists of a data section containing the peak list. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are irrelevant for this command. This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
  • Page 927 MMEMory Subsystem R&S FSL MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe:NEXT This command stores the current device settings in a *.FSL.dfl file. The file name used in the last saving process is automatically counted up to the next unused name. The numeric suffix in STORe<1|2> is irrelevant with this command. This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.

  • Page 928: Output Subsystem

    R&S FSL OUTPut Subsystem OUTPut Subsystem The OUTPut subsystem controls the output features of the instrument. Commands of the OUTPut Subsystem – OUTPut<1|2>[:STATe] (models with tracking generator) – OUTPut<1|2>:IF[:SOURce] – OUTPut:UPORt[:VALue] – OUTPut:UPORt:STATe OUTPut<1|2>[:STATe] (models with tracking generator) This command switches the tracking generator on or off. Note: With the tracking generator switched on, the maximum stop frequency is limited to 3 GHz.
  • Page 929 OUTPut Subsystem R&S FSL OUTPut<1|2>:IF[:SOURce] This command switches the source of the IF output between the demodulated signal (2 possible values) and the IF signal. Note: The AF output available at the frontpanel can only be used if the IF output source is set to video.
  • Page 930 R&S FSL OUTPut Subsystem OUTPut:UPORt:STATe This command switches the control line of the user ports between INPut and OUTPut. The user port is switched to OUTPut with parameter ON, to INPut with OFF. Parameter ON | OFF Example OUTP:UPOR:STAT ON Characteristics *RST value: OFF SCPI: device–specific...
  • Page 931 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem The SENSe subsystem is organized in several subsystems. The commands of these subsystems directly control device–specific settings, they do not refer to the signal characteristics of the measurement signal. The SENSe subsystem controls the essential parameters of the analyzer. In accordance with the SCPI standard, the keyword "SENSe"...

  • Page 932: Sense Subsystem

    R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem [SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage[:STATe<1...6>] This command switches on or off the average calculation for the selected trace (STATe<1...4>). The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Parameter ON | OFF Example AVER OFF Switches off the average calculation for trace 1. AVER:STAT3 ON Switches on the average calculation for trace 3.
  • Page 933 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:COUNt:AUTO This command is implemented only for reasons of compatibility with the FSP family. It selects a suitable number of counts for the selected measurement type. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Parameter ON | OFF Example AVER:COUN:AUTO ON Characteristics...
  • Page 934 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem SENSe:BANDwidth Subsystem This subsystem controls the setting of the instruments filter bandwidths. Both groups of commands (BANDwidth and BWIDth) perform the same functions. Commands of the SENSe:BANDwidth Subsystem – [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] – [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO – [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio – [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE –...
  • Page 935 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL Parameter ON | OFF Example BAND:AUTO OFF Switches off the coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the span. Characteristics *RST value: ON SCPI: conform Mode A–F, CATV, CDMA, EVDO [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio This command defines the ratio resolution bandwidth (Hz) / span (Hz). The ratio to be entered is reciprocal to the ratio span/RBW used in manual operation.
  • Page 936 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem Example BAND:TYPE NORM Characteristics *RST value: NORMal SCPI: device–specific Mode all, except ADEMOD [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo This command defines the instruments video bandwidth. The available video bandwidths are specified in the data sheet. The command is not available if FFT filtering is switched on and the set bandwidth is 30 kHz or if the quasi–peak detector is switched on.
  • Page 937 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio This command defines the ratio video bandwidth (Hz) / resolution bandwidth (Hz).The ratio to be entered is reciprocal to the ratio RBW/VBW used in manual operation. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Parameter 0.01 to 1000 Example BAND:VID:RAT 3 Sets the coupling of video bandwidth to video bandwidth = 3*resolution bandwidth...
  • Page 938 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem SENSe:CORRection Subsystem (Models with tracking generator) This subsystem controls calibration and normalization during operation with the tracking generator. Commands of the SENSe:CORRection Subsystem – [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection[:STATe] – [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] – [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:EGAin:INPut[:MAGNitude] – [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:METHod – [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:RECall – [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe] – [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe] –...
  • Page 939 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] When the tracking generator is active, this command determines the type of result acquisition for the normalization reference measurement and starts the measurement selected: To obtain a correct reference measurement, a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must have been carried out.
  • Page 940 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:METHod This command selects the type of measurement with active tracking generator (transmission/reflection). The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Parameter TRANsmission | REFLection Example CORR:METH TRAN Sets the type of measurement to "transmission". Characteristics *RST value: TRANsmission SCPI: device–specific Mode [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:RECall...
  • Page 941 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe] This command switches the automatic adjustment of the reference level to the selected transducer factor on or off. For details refer to chapter 4, section "Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration - SETUP Key", Ref Level Adjust Man/Auto softkey. Note: Prior to this command, the [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect...
  • Page 942 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem Example SENS:CORR:TRAN:SEL 'TRAN_1' Selects the transducer factor CORR:TRAN:UNIT 'DB' Selects the unit for the transducer. CORR:TRAN:DATA 1MHZ,-30,2MHZ,-40 Defines the frequency/level pairs 1 MHz, -30 dB and 2 MHz, -40 dB. Characteristics *RST value: - SCPI: device-specific Mode [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete This command deletes the selected transducer factor.
  • Page 943 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect This command selects the transducer factor designated by <name>. If <name> does not exist yet, a new transducer factor is created. Note: This command must be sent prior to the subsequent commands for modifying/activating transducer factors. This command is available from firmware version 1.10.
  • Page 944 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:VIEW This command switches on the display of the active transducer factor or set. Note: Prior to this command, the [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect command must be sent. This command is available from firmware version 1.10. Parameter ON | OFF Example CORR:TRAN:VIEW ON Characteristics...
  • Page 945 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL SENSe:DETector Subsystem The SENSe:DETector subsystem controls the acquisition of measurement data via the selection of the detector for the corresponding trace. Commands of the SENSe:DETector Subsystem – [SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1...6>[:FUNCtion] – [SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1...6>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO [SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1...6>[:FUNCtion] This command switches on the detector for the data acquisition in the selected trace. The trace is indicated as numeric suffix in DETector.
  • Page 946 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem SENSe:ESPectrum Subsystem The SENSe:ESPectrum subsystem contains the remote commands to configure Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurements. Commands of the SENSe:ESPectrum Subsystem – [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:BWID – [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC][:STATe] – [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa – [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:PRESet[:STANdard] – [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:PRESet:RESTore – [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:PRESet:STORe – [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RANGe<1...20>:BANDwidth – [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RANGe<1...20>:BANDwidth:RESolution –...
  • Page 947 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:BWID This command defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power (reference range). This setting takes only effect if channel power is selected as power reference type ([SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RTYPe command). The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. This command is available from firmware version 1.80.
  • Page 948 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa This command sets the alpha value of the RRC filter. This setting takes only effect if channel power is selected as power reference type ([SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RTYPe command) and if the RRC filter is activated ([SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC][:STATe] command). The numeric suffixes <1|2>...
  • Page 949 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:PRESet:RESTore This command copies the XML files from the C:\R_S\instr\sem_backup folder to the C:\R_S\instr\sem_std folder. Files of the same name are overwritten. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query. This command is available from firmware version 1.80.
  • Page 950 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem Characteristics RST value: 30.0 kHz SCPI: device–specific Mode A, CDMA, EVDO [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RANGe<1...20>:BANDwidth:VIDeo This command sets the VBW value for the specified range. The numeric suffixes <1...20> specify the range. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. This command is available from firmware version 1.80.
  • Page 951 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RANGe<1...20>:DELete This command deletes the specified range. The range numbers are updated accordingly. The reference range cannot be deleted. A minimum of three ranges is mandatory. The numeric suffixes <1...20> specify the range. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
  • Page 952 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RANGe<1...20>[:FREQuency]:STOP This command sets the stop frequency for the specified range. For further details refer to the command. [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RANGe<1...20>[:FREQuency]:STARt The numeric suffixes <1...20> specify the range. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. This command is available from firmware version 1.80. Parameter see rules in chapter 4, "Ranges and settings"...
  • Page 953 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL Example ESP:RANG3:INP:ATT 10 Sets the attenuation of range 3 to 10 dB. Characteristics RST value: 0 dB SCPI: device–specific Mode A, CDMA, EVDO [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RANGe<1...20>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO This command activates or deactivates the automatic RF attenuation setting for the specified range.
  • Page 954 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RANGe<1...20>:INSert This command inserts a new range before or after the specified range. The range numbers are updated accordingly. The numeric suffixes <1...20> specify the range. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. This command is available from firmware version 1.80. Parameter AFTer | BEFore Example...
  • Page 955 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL Example ESP:RANG1:LIM:ABS:STOP 20 Sets an absolute limit of 20 dBm at the stop frequency of the range. Characteristics RST value: –13 dBm SCPI: device–specific Mode A, CDMA, EVDO [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RANGe<1...20>:LIMit:RELative:STARt This command sets a relative limit value at the start frequency of the specified range. Different from manual operation, this setting is independently of the defined limit check type.
  • Page 956 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RANGe<1...20>:LIMit:STATe This command sets the type of limit check for all ranges. The numeric suffixes are not relevant. This command is available from firmware version 1.80. Parameter ABSolute Checks only the absolute limits defined. RELative Checks only the relative limits. Relative limits are defined as relative to the measured power in the reference range.
  • Page 957 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RANGe<1...20>:SWEep:TIME This command sets the sweep time for the specified range. The numeric suffixes <1...20> specify the range. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. This command is available from firmware version 1.80. Parameter Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW. For details refer to the data sheet.
  • Page 958 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem Example ESP:RANG1:TRAN 'test' Sets the transducer called test for range 1. Characteristics RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode A, CDMA, EVDO [SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RRANge? This command returns the current position (number) of the reference range. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value.
  • Page 959 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL SENSe:FREQuency Subsystem The SENSe:FREQuency subsystem defines the frequency axis of the active display. The frequency axis can either be defined via the start/stop frequency or via the center frequency and span. Commands of the SENSe:FREQuency Subsystem –...
  • Page 960 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP This command defines the step size of the center frequency. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Parameter 0 to f Example FREQ:CENT:STEP 120MHz Characteristics *RST value: – (AUTO 0.1 × SPAN is switched on) SCPI: conform Mode [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO...
  • Page 961 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL Characteristics *RST value: SPAN SCPI: device–specific Mode A, ADEMOD, CDMA, EVDO [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor This command couples the step size of the center frequency with a factor to the span (span >0) or to the resolution bandwidth (span = 0). The numeric suffixes <1|2>...
  • Page 962 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:OFFSet This command defines the frequency offset of the instrument. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Parameter –100 GHz to 100 GHz Example FREQ:OFFS 1GHZ Characteristics *RST value: 0 Hz SCPI: conform Mode A, ADEMOD, CDMA, EVDO, WCDMA [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN This command defines the frequency span in the Spectrum Analyzer mode.
  • Page 963 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STARt This command defines the start frequency of the analyzer. This command is only available with span > 0. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Parameter 0 to f is specified in the data sheet. To help analyze signals located at the end of the frequency range, for R&S FSL models with an upper frequency limit of 6 GHz or less, the f value is extended by 0.05 GHz for direct entry.
  • Page 964 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem SENSe:LIST Subsystem The commands of this subsystem are used for measuring the power at a list of frequency points with different device settings. The measurement is always performed in zero span. A new trigger event is required for each test point (exception: trigger FREE RUN).
  • Page 965 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL • Instrument setup and querying of the result list at the end of the measurement: With this method, the control computer may be used for other activities while the measurement is being performed. However, more time is needed for synchronization via service request. [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:POWer[:SEQuence] This command configures the list of settings (max.
  • Page 966 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem Return values The query command returns a list of comma–separated values (CSV) which contains the power measurement results in floating–point format. The unit depends on the setting with CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer The command SENSe:LIST:POWer? 935.2MHz,0dBm,10dB,OFF,NORM,1MHz,3MHz,440us,0, 935.4MHz,0dBm,10dB,10dB,NORM,30kHz,100kHz,440us,0, 935.6MHz,0dBm,10dB,20dB,NORM,30kHz,100kHz,440us,0 thus returns the following list, for example: –28.3,–30.6,–38.1 If the command sequence is extended to SENSe:LIST:POWer:SET ON,ON,ON,IMM,POS,0,0...
  • Page 967 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:POWer:RESult? This command queries the result of a previous list measurement as configured and initiated with [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:POWer[:SEQuence]. The measured results are output in a list of floating point values separated by commas. The unit of the results depends on the setting made with the command.
  • Page 968 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem Possible values: IMMediate | EXTernal | VIDeo | IFPower <trigger slope> Used trigger slope Possible values: POSitive | NEGative <trigger offset> Offset between the detection of the trigger signal and the start of the measurement at the next frequency point. Range of values: 0 s, 125 ns to 100s <gate length>...
  • Page 969 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL SENSe:LIST:RANGe Subsystem The SENSe:LIST:RANGe Subsystem contains the remote commands to configure Spurious Emissions measurements. Commands of the SENSe:LIST:RANGe Subsystem – [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>:BANDwidth – [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>:BANDwidth:RESolution – [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>:BANDwidth:VIDeo – [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>:BREak – [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>:DELete – [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>:COUNt? – [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>:DETector – [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>[:FREQuency]:STARt – [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>[:FREQuency]:STOP –...
  • Page 970 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>:BANDwidth:VIDeo For details refer to "[SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RANGe<1...20>:BANDwidth:VIDeo" on page 6.191. This command is available from firmware version 1.80. [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>:BREak This command configures the sweep behavior. The numeric suffixes are not relevant. This command is available from firmware version 1.80. Parameter The R&S FSL stops after one range is swept and continues only if you confirm (a message box is displayed).
  • Page 971 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL Parameter APEak auto peak detector NEGative minimum peak detector POSitive peak detector SAMPle sample detector RMS detector AVERage average detector Example LIST:RANGe3:DET SAMP Sets the sample detector for range 3. Characteristics RST value: RMS SCPI: device–specific Mode [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>[:FREQuency]:STARt For details refer to...
  • Page 972 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>:INPut:GAIN:STATe For details refer to "[SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RANGe<1...20>:INPut:GAIN:STATe" on page 6.194. This command is available from firmware version 1.80. [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>:POINts This command sets the number of sweep points for the specified range. The numeric suffixes <1...20> specify the range. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. This command is available from firmware version 1.80.
  • Page 973 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>:LIMit:STOP For details refer to "[SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RANGe<1...20>:LIMit:ABSolute:STOP" on page 6.195. This command is available from firmware version 1.80. [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>:LIMit:STATe For details refer to "[SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RANGe<1...20>:LIMit:STATe" on page 6.197. This command is available from firmware version 1.80. [SENSe<1|2>:]LIST:RANGe<1...20>:TRANsducer For details refer to "[SENSe<1|2>:]ESPectrum:RANGe<1...20>:TRANsducer"...
  • Page 974 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem SENSe:MPOWer Subsystem The commands of this subsystem are used to determine the mean burst power or peak burst power for a given number of signal bursts, and for outputting the results in a list. Since all the settings required for a measurement are combined in a single command, the measurement speed is considerably higher than when using individual commands.
  • Page 975 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL • trigger source • trigger level • trigger offset • type of power measurement (PEAK, MEAN) • number of bursts to be measured The commands of this subsystem can be used in two different ways: • Setting up the instrument and at the same time querying the result list: This method ensures the smallest delay between measurement and the output of the measured values, but requires the control computer to wait actively for the response of the instrument.
  • Page 976 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem <type of meas> Determines whether mean power (RMS) or peak power (PEAK) is to be measured. The detector is selected accordingly. Possible values: MEAN, PEAK <# of meas> Number of individual bursts to be measured. Range: 1 to 32001 Return values The query command returns a list separated by commas (comma separated values = CSV), which contains the power measurement results in floating–point format.
  • Page 977 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]MPOWer:FTYPe This command defines the filter type for the measurement. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Parameter NORMal | CFILter | RRC Example SENSe:MPOWer:FTYPe CFILter Characteristics *RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode [SENSe<1|2>:]MPOWer:RESult[:LIST]? This command queries the results of a multiple burst power measurement as configured and initiated with [SENSe<1|2>:]MPOWer[:SEQuence].
  • Page 978 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem [SENSe<1|2>:]MPOWer:RESult:MIN? This command queries the minimum power value in a multiple burst power measurement as configured and initiated with [SENSe<1|2>:]MPOWer[:SEQuence]. The unit used for the return values is always dBm. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. If no measurement result is available, the command will return a query error.
  • Page 979 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL SENSe:POWer Subsystem This subsystem controls the setting of the instruments channel and adjacent channel power measurements. Commands of the SENSe:POWer Subsystem – [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs – [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel] – [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel – [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate<1...11> – [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE – [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet – [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel – [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO –...
  • Page 980 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel] This command sets the channel bandwidth of the radio communication system. The bandwidths of adjacent channels are not influenced by this modification. With set to ON, steep–edged channel filters are available. [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:HSPeed For further information on filters refer to chapter "Instrument Functions", section "List of available RRC and channel filters".
  • Page 981 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate<1...11> This command defines the channel bandwidth of the alternate adjacent channels of the radio transmission system. If the channel bandwidth of alternate adjacent channel 1 is changed, the bandwidth of alternate adjacent channels 2 to 11 is automatically set to the same value. With set to ON, steep–edged channel filters are available.
  • Page 982 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem Parameter ACPower | CPOWer | MCACpower | OBANdwidth | OBWidth | CN | CN0 Example POW:ACH:PRES ACP Sets the frequency span, the measurement bandwidths and the detector as required for the ACP measurement. INIT:CONT OFF Switches over to single sweep mode. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end of the sweep.
  • Page 983 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL Example POW:ACH:REF:AUTO ONCE Characteristics RST value: – SCPI: device–specific Mode A–F [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO This command activates the automatic selection of a transmission channel to be used as a reference channel in relative adjacent–channel power measurements. The transmission channel with the highest power, the transmission channel with the lowest power, or the transmission channel nearest to the adjacent channels can be defined as a reference channel.
  • Page 984 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem Characteristics *RST value: 1 SCPI: device–specific Mode A–F [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] This command defines the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent channel (ADJ). The modification of the adjacent–channel spacing (ADJ) causes a change in all higher adjacent–channel spacings (ALT1, ALT2, ...): they are all multiplied by the same factor (new spacing value / old spacing value).
  • Page 985 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<1...11> This command defines the channel spacing for the carrier signals. The numeric suffixes <1...11> defines the TX channel. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Parameter 14 kHz to 2000 MHz Example POW:ACH:SPAC:CHAN 25kHz Characteristics *RST value: 20 kHz SCPI: device–specific Mode...
  • Page 986 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem Characteristics *RST value: 99PCT SCPI: device–specific Mode A–F [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:HSPeed This command switches on or off the high–speed channel/adjacent channel power measurement. The measurement itself is performed in zero span on the center frequencies of the individual channels. The command automatically switches to zero span and back. Depending on the selected mobile radio standard, weighting filters with cos characteristic or very steep–sided channel filters are used for band limitation.
  • Page 987 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL SENSe:ROSCillator Subsystem This subsystem controls the reference oscillator. The numeric suffix in SENSe is irrelevant for the commands of this subsystem. Commands of the SENSe:ROSCillator Subsystem – [SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator:SOURce [SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator:SOURce This command controls selection of the reference oscillator. If the external reference oscillator is selected, the reference signal must be connected to the rear panel of the instrument.
  • Page 988 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem SENSe:SWEep Subsystem The SENSe:SWEep subsystem controls the sweep parameters. Commands of the SENSe:SWEep Subsystem – [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt – [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent? – [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe – [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff – [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth – [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity – [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce – [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE – [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:MODE – [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:POINts – [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME –...
  • Page 989 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent? This query command returns the current number of started sweeps. A sweep count value should be set and the device should be in single sweep mode. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Example SWE:COUNt 64 Sets sweep count to 64 INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode...
  • Page 990 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem Characteristics *RST value: OFF SCPI: device–specific Mode A, WLAN, OFDM, OFDMA/WiBro [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff This command defines the delay time between the external gate signal and the continuation of the sweep. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Parameter 125 Us to 100 s Example...
  • Page 991 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL Example SWE:EGAT:POL POS Characteristics *RST value: POSitive SCPI: device–specific Mode [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce This command toggles between external gate signal and IF power signal as a signal source for the gate mode. If an IF power signal is used, the gate is opened as soon as a signal at > –20 dBm is detected within the IF path bandwidth (10 MHz).
  • Page 992 R&S FSL SENSe Subsystem Characteristics *RST value: EDGE SCPI: device–specific Mode [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:MODE This command changes from Spectrum Analyzer to Spectrum Emission Mask or Spurious Emissions measurement mode and back. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. This command is available from firmware version 1.80. Parameter AUTO Switches to Spectrum Analyzer measurement mode or stays in the...
  • Page 993 SENSe Subsystem R&S FSL [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME In analyzer mode, this command defines the sweep time. The available time values vary depending on the span setting. is directly programmed, automatic coupling to resolution [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME bandwidth and video bandwidth is switched off. The numeric suffixes <1|2> are not relevant. Parameter refer to data sheet Example...

  • Page 994: Source Subsystem

    R&S FSL SOURce Subsystem SOURce Subsystem The SOURce subsystem controls the output signals of the instrument. The following subsystem is included: • "SOURce:POWer Subsystem" on page 6.235 Commands of the SOURce subsystem – SOURce<1|2>:EXTernal<1|2>:ROSCillator[:SOURce] – SOURce:TEMPerature:APRobe? SOURce<1|2>:EXTernal<1|2>:ROSCillator[:SOURce] This command switches between external and internal reference oscillator. Parameter INTernal | EXTernal Example...
  • Page 995 SOURce Subsystem R&S FSL SOURce:POWer Subsystem (models with tracking generator) The SOURce:POWer subsystem controls the power of the tracking generator signal. Commands of the SOURce:POWer Subsystem – SOURce<1|2>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] – SOURce<1|2>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet SOURce<1|2>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] This command defines the output level of the tracking generator. Parameter <numeric_value>...

  • Page 996: Status Subsystem

    R&S FSL STATus Subsystem STATus Subsystem The STATus subsystem contains the commands for the status reporting system (for details refer to chapter 5 "Remote Control – Basics", section "Status Reporting System"). *RST does not influence the status registers. The following subsystem is included: •...
  • Page 997 STATus Subsystem R&S FSL STATus:OPERation:ENABle This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:OPERation register. The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the summary bit in the status byte. Parameter 0 to 65535 Example STAT:OPER:ENAB 65535...
  • Page 998 R&S FSL STATus Subsystem STATus:PRESet This command resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a defined value. All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh, i.e. all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected. All NTRansition parts are set to 0, i.e. a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected. The ENABle part of the STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable registers are set to 0, i.e.
  • Page 999 STATus Subsystem R&S FSL – STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<1|2>:CONDition? – STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<1|2>:ENABle – STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<1|2>:NTRansition – STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<1|2>:PTRansition – STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]? – STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? – STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle – STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition – STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition – STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]? – STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition? – STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:ENABle – STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:NTRansition – STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:PTRansition STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable register. The contents of the EVENt section are deleted after the readout.
  • Page 1000 R&S FSL STATus Subsystem STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable register. The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the summary bit in the status byte. Parameter 0 to 65535 Example STAT:QUES:ENAB 65535...

This manual is also suitable for:

R&s fsl6R&s fsl18

Table of Contents

Save PDF